You are on page 1of 445

8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Petroleum xperts 

PVTP

Version 6.5

October , 2003

USER GUIDE

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 1/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 2/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................1
1.1 PVT provides...........................................................................................................................1

2 Installation and Windows Basics ..............................................................................................1


2.1 Software and Hardware Requirements ...................................................................................1
2.1.1 Upgrading from a Previous Version ..............................................................................3

2.2 Installing PVTP........................................................................................................................3


2.2.1 Running Setup...............................................................................................................4
2.2.2 The PROSPER.INI file ..................................................................................................4

2.3 Starting PVTP..........................................................................................................................5


2.3.1 Connecting The Software Protection Bitlock.................................................................5
2.3.2 Creating the PVTP Icon.................................................................................................5

2.4 REMOTE Software Utility ........................................................................................................6


2.4.1 Entering the User Authorisation Code...........................................................................6
2.4.2 Updating the Software Protection Bitlock......................................................................8

2.5 Program Check List.................................................................................................................8

3 File Management .........................................................................................................................1


3.1 PVT File Types........................................................................................................................1

3.2 PVT Data Files ........................................................................................................................2


3.2.1 PVT Project File (*.PVI ) ................................................................................................2
3.2.2 Extract Data (*.PVI) .......................................................................................................2
3.2.3 PVT Import ....................................................................................................................2
3.2.4 PVT Export Files............................................................................................................4
3.2.5 PROSPER EoS Composition (*.PRP)..........................................................................4
3.2.6 PROSPER Hydrate Formation (*.PHY).........................................................................5
3.2.7 General Data Export (*.PVE)........................................................................................5
3.2.8 Black Oil Tables (*.PTB)................................................................................................8
3.2.9 MBAL MultiI-PVT Export (*.PGD)................................................................................13
3.2.10 MBAL PVT with Depth - Black Oil Match Tables ........................................................16
3.2.11 MBAL Variable Bubble Point(Oil) Export (*.PVB)........................................................20
3.2.12 Saturated.....................................................................................................................20
3.2.13 Undersaturated............................................................................................................20

3.3 MBAL Variable Bpt. Calculation Dialog.................................................................................25


3.3.1 Eclipse Type Export (*.INC) ........................................................................................29
3.3.2 Eclipse Export Setup Dialog.......................................................................................30
3.3.3 Eclipse Export Tables..................................................................................................34
3.3.4 Eclipse Compositional Export (*.PVO) .......................................................................37
3.3.5 PVT Temporary Files ..................................................................................................38
3.3.5.1 Temporary Data File (*.PSV)...............................................................................38

3.4 File Operations ......................................................................................................................38


3.4.1 Creating a New File.....................................................................................................38
3.4.2 Opening an Existing File .............................................................................................38
3.4.3 Saving a File................................................................................................................39
3.4.4 Copying a File..............................................................................................................39
3.4.5 Closing Files................................................................................................................39
3.4.6 Restore Temp File.......................................................................................................39

3.5 Software Key Maintenance ...................................................................................................40


3.5.1 Viewing the Software Key ...........................................................................................40

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 3/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

3.6 Printing ..................................................................................................................................40


3.6.1 Printer Set-up ..............................................................................................................40
3.6.2 Printing a Report..........................................................................................................41

3.7 Units System .........................................................................................................................42


3.7.1 Unit Options.................................................................................................................42
3.7.2 Variables......................................................................................................................42
3.7.3 Validation.....................................................................................................................43
3.7.4 Unit Systems ...............................................................................................................43
3.7.5 Changing the Units......................................................................................................43
3.7.6 Validation Limits ..........................................................................................................43

3.8 Command Buttons.................................................................................................................44

4 Models and Model Options.........................................................................................................1


4.1 The Black Oil Model ................................................................................................................1

4.2 The Equation of State Model...................................................................................................1


4.2.1 The Acentric Factor .......................................................................................................2
4.2.2 The Binary Interaction Coefficient .................................................................................6
4.2.3 Volume Shift ..................................................................................................................8
4.2.3.1 Volume Shift Setup........................................................................................................9

4.3 Wax Modelling .......................................................................................................................12


4.3.1 Wax Model Details.......................................................................................................15
4.3.2 Wax Model References ...............................................................................................18

4.4 Hydrates ................................................................................................................................19


4.4.1 Background to Hydrates..............................................................................................19
4.4.2 Hydrate Modelling........................................................................................................21
4.4.3 Hydrate Inhibition.........................................................................................................23
4.4.4 Hydrate Model References..........................................................................................24

4.5 Compositional Gradient.........................................................................................................25


4.5.1 Background to Compositional Gradient ......................................................................25
4.5.2 Compositional Gradient References ...........................................................................28

4.6 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity Models..........................................................................29


4.6.1 Lohrenz,Bray,ClarkViscosity Model.............................................................................30
4.6.2 Pedersen et al Viscosity Model ...................................................................................31
4.6.3 Zhou et al Viscosity Model ..........................................................................................32
4.6.4 Little and Kennedy Viscosity Model.............................................................................34
4.6.5 Thermal Conductivity Model........................................................................................35
4.6.6 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity References.........................................................36

4.7 Water Modelling ....................................................................................................................38


4.7.1 Water Modelling References .......................................................................................39

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 4/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

5 Main/Stream Options ..................................................................................................................1


5.1 PVT Main Menu.......................................................................................................................1
5.1.1 File.................................................................................................................................2
5.1.2 Options ..........................................................................................................................2
5.1.3 Data ...............................................................................................................................2
5.1.4 Calculation.....................................................................................................................2
5.1.5 Calc. Solids....................................................................................................................2
5.1.6 Streams .........................................................................................................................2
5.1.7 Reporting.......................................................................................................................2
5.1.8 Utilities ...........................................................................................................................2
5.1.9 Preferences ...................................................................................................................3
5.1.10 Window..........................................................................................................................3

5.2 Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................3

5.3 Summary Page........................................................................................................................6

5.4 Option Selection ......................................................................................................................8


5.4.1 Option Selection ............................................................................................................8
5.4.2 PVT Method...................................................................................................................8
5.4.3 Fluid Type......................................................................................................................9
5.4.4 Separator.......................................................................................................................9
5.4.5 Equation of State...........................................................................................................9
5.4.6 User Information ............................................................................................................9
5.4.7 User Comments...........................................................................................................10

5.5 Streams Menu .......................................................................................................................10


5.5.1 Edit Stream Details......................................................................................................11
5.5.2 Add Stream..................................................................................................................11
5.5.3 Delete Stream..............................................................................................................14
5.5.4 Create a Stream to a target GOR................................................................................15
5.5.5 Create a Stream to a target Saturation Pressure........................................................16
5.5.6 Blend Streams.............................................................................................................18
5.5.7 Allocate:Blend Streams to a Target GOR ...................................................................19
5.5.8 Add Water : Create a Stream with a Fixed Amount of Water .....................................21
5.5.9 Add Water : Create a Stream Saturated with Water ...................................................22

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 5/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

6 Black Oil Input .............................................................................................................................1


6.1 BLACK OIL PVT - General......................................................................................................1

6.2 Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................2


6.2.1 BLACK OIL PVT - Oil ....................................................................................................3
6.2.2 Match Data ....................................................................................................................3
6.2.3 Regression ....................................................................................................................4
6.2.4 Match.............................................................................................................................4
6.2.5 Match-all ........................................................................................................................4
6.2.6 Parameters ....................................................................................................................5
6.2.7 Viewing the Match Parameters .....................................................................................5
6.2.8 Calculations...................................................................................................................5
6.2.9 Calculating PVT Data ....................................................................................................6
6.2.10 Plotting the Calculated Data..........................................................................................7
6.2.11 BLACK OIL PVT - Dry and Wet Gas.............................................................................8
6.2.11.1 Input Data ..............................................................................................................8
6.2.11.2 Match Data ............................................................................................................8
6.2.12 BLACK OIL PVT - Retrograde Condensate ..................................................................9
6.2.12.1 Input Data ..............................................................................................................9
6.2.12.2 Match Data ............................................................................................................9

7 Input Data EoS.............................................................................................................................1


7.1 General Project Data Structure ...............................................................................................1
7.1.1 STREAMS .....................................................................................................................1
7.1.2 PSEUDO STORAGE.....................................................................................................2

7.2 Selecting Components ............................................................................................................3


7.2.1 User Database Entries ..................................................................................................4
7.2.2 Recombination...............................................................................................................5
7.2.2.1 MODE....................................................................................................................5

7.3 Edit Composition .....................................................................................................................9

7.4 Pseudo Properties.................................................................................................................14


7.4.1 Auto Matching of Densities..........................................................................................15
7.4.2 Automatic Mode...........................................................................................................16
7.4.3 Manual Mode...............................................................................................................17
7.4.4 Hint on Method ............................................................................................................17
7.4.5 Auto-Matching of Densities and Viscosities ................................................................19
7.4.6 AutoMatching Viscosities ............................................................................................20
7.4.7 Splitting/Profilling Last Pseudo....................................................................................20
7.4.8 Original Numbers Store...............................................................................................22
7.4.9 Advanced Splitting Dialog ...........................................................................................22
7.4.10 Split Profiles.................................................................................................................23
7.4.11 COPYING A SPLIT......................................................................................................26
7.4.12 Split Profile Dialog .......................................................................................................26
7.4.13 COPYING A PROFILE ................................................................................................28

7.5 Binary Interaction Coefficients...............................................................................................29

7.6 Grouping and Properties Information....................................................................................30


7.6.1 Control Buttons............................................................................................................32
7.6.2 OmegaA and OmegaB................................................................................................34
7.6.3 Plotting Component Properties ...................................................................................36

7.7 Grouping................................................................................................................................37

7.8 Reference Data .....................................................................................................................39

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 6/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

7.9 Decontamination ...................................................................................................................40


7.9.1 Edit Mole Percents ......................................................................................................40
7.9.2 Decontamination Control Dialog..................................................................................41
7.9.2.1 Decontamination Mode Selection Dialog ............................................................44
7.9.2.2 Decontamination Quick Look Dialog ...................................................................44
7.9.2.3 Decontamination Pseudos Dialog .......................................................................46
7.10 Match Data ............................................................................................................................47
7.10.1 Matching on Mixture Critical Temperature ..................................................................50

7.11 Regression ............................................................................................................................52


7.11.1 Regression Parameter Selection Dialog .....................................................................55
7.11.2 Volume Shift ................................................................................................................57
7.11.3 Control Buttons............................................................................................................57
7.11.4 Mouse Shortcuts..........................................................................................................58
7.11.5 Separator.....................................................................................................................58
7.11.6 What Properties to Use in Regression........................................................................59
7.11.7 Matching Viscosity.......................................................................................................59
7.11.8 Regression With Solids ...............................................................................................63
7.11.9 Model Selection...........................................................................................................65
7.11.10 Notes on Regression ...................................................................................................65
7.11.11 Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB .....................................................................66

7.12 Plot Test Points .....................................................................................................................67

8 Calculation EoS ...........................................................................................................................1


8.1 Critical Point Calculation .........................................................................................................2

8.2 Phase Envelope ......................................................................................................................3

8.3 Ranged Saturation Pressure...................................................................................................7

8.4 Constant Composition Expansion (CCE) ................................................................................9


8.4.1 The Calculation Display...............................................................................................13
8.4.2 The Analysis Display ...................................................................................................15
8.4.3 The Copy to Clipboard Dialog .....................................................................................17

8.5 Constant Volume Depletion(CVD) ........................................................................................18

8.6 Depletion Study(DEPL) .........................................................................................................21

8.7 Differential Expansion(DIFF).................................................................................................24

8.8 Composite Differential Expansion(COMPOS).......................................................................27

8.9 Separator Process.................................................................................................................29

8.10 Compositional Gradient.........................................................................................................34


8.10.1 Calculation Results Display.........................................................................................38

8.11 Swelling Test .........................................................................................................................39

8.12 Slim-tube Simulation .............................................................................................................41


8.12.1 Slim-tube Input dialog..................................................................................................42
8.12.2 Slim-tube cell data dialog ............................................................................................46
8.12.3 Slim-tube cell data dialog ............................................................................................47
8.12.4 Slim-tube time steps dialog .........................................................................................48
8.12.5 Slim-tube calculations dialog.......................................................................................49

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 7/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

8.12.6 Slim-tube analysis dialog.............................................................................................51


8.12.7 Slim-tube cell detail dialog...........................................................................................52

8.13 Quick Calculation Control Button ..........................................................................................53


8.13.1 Small Separator Calculation Dialog.............................................................................55

9 Calculation of Solids...................................................................................................................1
9.1 Wax Amount Calculation.........................................................................................................1
9.1.1 The Analysis Display .....................................................................................................4

9.2 Wax Appearance Temperature ...............................................................................................5

9.3 Hydrate Formation Pressure ...................................................................................................8


9.3.1 Calculations Dialog......................................................................................................12

9.4 Hydrate Minimum Inhibitor Concentration.............................................................................12

10 Reporting......................................................................................................................................1
10.1 Setting Up the Reporting System............................................................................................1

10.2 Reports....................................................................................................................................1

10.3 Template Editor Commands....................................................................................................4

11 Plotting 1
11.1 The Plot Display ......................................................................................................................1
11.1.1 Manipulating Streams....................................................................................................1
11.1.2 Manipulating Curves......................................................................................................2
11.1.3 The Plot Menu and Toolbar...........................................................................................5

11.2 Plot Menu Options...................................................................................................................7


11.2.1 File.................................................................................................................................7
11.2.2 Display...........................................................................................................................8
11.2.3 Output............................................................................................................................9

11.3 The Toolbar Options..............................................................................................................10

12 Utilities 1
12.1 API/Density Calculator ............................................................................................................1

12.2 Mass Balance Calculator.........................................................................................................2

12.3 Enthalpy Balance Calculator ...................................................................................................4


12.3.1 Single Point Enthalpy Balance ......................................................................................4
12.3.2 Multiple Point Enthalpy Balance....................................................................................5

12.4 Hoffmann Quality Plot .............................................................................................................7

13 User Databases ...........................................................................................................................1


13.1 Creating a User Database.......................................................................................................2

13.2 Selecting a User Database Directory......................................................................................3

13.3 Editing a User Database .........................................................................................................4

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 8/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

13.4 Importing into User Database..................................................................................................6

14 Preferences..................................................................................................................................1
14.1 Adjusting the Equation of State Calculation Tolerences .........................................................2

Appendix A - Worked Examples .......................................................................................................1


 A1 Example 1 - EOS calibration of oil sample using PVTP..........................................................1
 A1.1 Step-by-step approach to building an EOS model in PVTP..........................................3
 A1.2 Step-by-step approach to Calibrating an EOS model in PVTP...................................14
 A1.3 Using PVTP to generate Tables for other applications ...............................................23

 A2 Example 2 - EOS calibration of a Condensate Sample using PVTP....................................30


 A2.1 Step-by-step approach to building an EOS model in PVTP........................................33
 A2.2 Calibrating an the EOS model in PVTP ......................................................................37
 A2.3 Checking results of the calibrated model against lab data..........................................40
 A2.4 Simulating PVT Experiments in PVTP ........................................................................42

 A3 Example 3 – Estimating Decontaminated sample properties of an contaminated Oil Sample


using PVTP......................................................................................................................................47
 A3.1 Step-by-step approach to decontamination in PVTP ..................................................50

Appendix B Step by Step Guide .......................................................................................................1


B1 List of Steps.............................................................................................................................1
B1.1 Step 1: Create a New File .............................................................................................2
B1.2 Step 2: Select Equation of State Options......................................................................3
B1.3 Step 3: Select Components...........................................................................................4
B1.4 Step 4: Enter Composition ............................................................................................6

B2 Sample PVT Report Composition ...........................................................................................8


B2.1 Step 5: Initialise the Pseudo Component Properties.....................................................9
B2.2 Step 6: Match the Surface Volumetric Properties (Density, GOR etc.) using the
 Automatch feature .......................................................................................................................11
B2.3 Step 7: Use Pseudo-Splitting or BI Coefficients to get near Reservoir Saturation
Pressure Value............................................................................................................................13
B2.3.1 Strategy for Achieving Saturation Pressure ........................................................15
B2.3.2 Using BI Coefficients...........................................................................................18
B2.3.3 Using Pseudo Splitting ........................................................................................20
B2.4 Step 8: Select Match Parameters................................................................................22
B2.4.1 How is Match Data entered? ...............................................................................23
B2.5 Step 9: Use Regression to Match Fluid.......................................................................27
B2.6 Step 10: Check and Refine the Fluid Characterisation ...............................................29
B2.7 Step 11: Calculate, Report and Export........................................................................30

Appendix C Decontamination Procedure ........................................................................................1

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 9/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

Appendix D PVTP OPEN SERVER Manual...........................................................................................1


D1 Introduction..............................................................................................................................1
D1.1 About This Guide...........................................................................................................1
D1.2 What is in this guide ......................................................................................................1
D1.3 How To Use This Guide ................................................................................................2
D1.4 Symbols and Conventions.............................................................................................2
D2 Overview..................................................................................................................................3
D2.1 Basic Functions .............................................................................................................3
D2.2 GetValue........................................................................................................................3
D2.3 SetValue ........................................................................................................................3
D2.4 DoCommand .................................................................................................................3
D2.5 Calling the Functions.....................................................................................................4
D2.6 Automation ....................................................................................................................4
D2.7 Batch File.......................................................................................................................4

D3 Potential Uses .........................................................................................................................5


D3.1 Batch Runs....................................................................................................................5
D3.2 Custom Reporting..........................................................................................................5
D3.3 Data Import/Export ........................................................................................................6
D3.4 Enhanced Prediction Runs in GAP ...............................................................................6
D3.5 Running PETEX programs with other engineering software applications.....................6

D4 Support....................................................................................................................................7

D5 Using the OPENSERVER ...........................................................................................................8


D5.1 Variable Text Strings .....................................................................................................8
D5.2 Automation ....................................................................................................................9
D5.2.1 Example Macro....................................................................................................10
D5.2.2 Framework...........................................................................................................11
D5.2.3 DoCommand .......................................................................................................12
D5.2.4 SetValue ..............................................................................................................12
D5.2.5 DoCommandAsync..............................................................................................13
D5.2.6 GetValue..............................................................................................................13
D5.3 Batch File.....................................................................................................................15
D5.3.1 Running a Batch File ...........................................................................................15
D5.3.2 Formatting Commands........................................................................................16
D5.3.3 DoCommand .......................................................................................................16
D5.3.4 SetValue ..............................................................................................................16
D5.3.5 GetValue and GetValPrint ...................................................................................17

D6 PVTP and the OPENSERVER ..................................................................................................18


D6.1 OverView .....................................................................................................................18
D6.2 File and Streams .........................................................................................................19
D6.3 BLACKOIL...................................................................................................................20
D6.4 OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................21
D6.5 STREAMBASE[stream no. or stream name] ..............................................................22
D6.6 STREAMRUN[stream no. or stream name] ................................................................25
D6.7 CALCUL[stream no. or stream name].........................................................................27
D6.8 Carrying out Calculations and Obtaining Results........................................................31
D6.8.1 Analysis ...............................................................................................................33
D6.9 Flash Calculation.........................................................................................................34
D6.10 Small Separator Calculation........................................................................................34
D6.11 Saturation Pressure at Reference Calculation............................................................36
D6.12 Recombination Calculations........................................................................................36
D6.13 Allocate: Blending to a target GOR .............................................................................37

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 10/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP   P V
T

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 11/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP
















http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 12/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Measurement Units

Reporting

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 13/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 Installation and Windows


Basics
This chapter explains how to install PVTP  on your computer. The guide assumes
you have a working knowledge of Windows terms and procedures. If you are
unfamiliar with the Windows operating system, we recommend you read the
relevant sections in the Microsoft Windows User's Guide  to learn more about
Windows operations.

This chapter gives instructions on installing the program to a Windows 98, 2000 or
Windows NT operating system.

2.1 Software and Hardware Requirements


The program supports all Windows-certified device drivers that are shipped with
Windows. The list of devices, software and hardware supported by Windows is
included with the documentation of your copy of Windows.

PVTP can be run as single User licence or on a Network. In either case, a special


security key is needed. The security key is called Bitlock for stand-alone licences
and Hardlock  for network licences

The security key is provided by Petroleum Experts.

The minimum requirement recommended for PVTP  is Pentium 450 MHz machine
with 128 Mbytes.

In order to install the software from the CD, the machine should have access to a
CD drive.

For a stand-alone licence, a security key (Bitlock) provided by Petroleum Experts


must be attached to the parallel printer port of the PC before PVTP can be run.

For network installation, the security key (Hardlock) can be attached to any PC
communicating with the network.
You should refer to the separate installation procedure for network Hardlock sent
with the purchase of a Hardlock licence.

If PVTP has been installed for the first time on a machine, the Bitlock driver must be
installed on this machine in order to establish the link between the software and the
security key (Bitlock driver).

In order to install the Bitlock driver, you will have to start from the main Windows
screen. Here you click on |Start |Programs |Petroleum Experts IPM |Utilities and
then start the “Set-up Bitlock Driver”.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 14/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2-8 PVTP  User Guide

This will prompt the following screen.

From the screen above, you will have to run the |Functions |Install Sentinel Driver |
OK.

You might need to modify the path of the sentinel files.


You should ensure that you have the permission to install a driver.
Your IT manager can help you getting the required permission. 

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 15/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 2 - Installation and Windows Basics 3-8

2.1.1 Upgrading from a Previous Version


For convenience in running linked models, Petroleum Experts software products
now installs by default into a common sub-directory \Program Files \Petroleum
Experts\IPM X.Y.

If you wish to keep an original version of the program, back it up into another
directory before installing the upgrade.

 All program upgrades are backward compatible. This ensures that data files
  created with earlier versions of the program can still be read by later
program versions. However, if you save a data file with the new version,
that file can no longer be opened by earlier versions!  As with all new
software installations, always back up your PVTP files.

2.2 Installing PVTP 


Before installing the program on your computer, you should first determine:

• The drive where the program is to be installed


• The amount of space available on the selected drive
• When installing on a network, verify you have the necessary access rights to
create directories and files on the designated volume.

What Set-up does
The installation procedure:

• Creates a program directory on your hard disk.


• Creates a sample files sub directory on your hard disk.
• Unpacks the PVTP  program and related files to the selected drive and
directory.
• Creates a program initialisation file PROSPER.INI in your Windows directory.
• Creates a new Windows program group and icon for both PVTP  and
REMOTE.

If you are updating PVTP, the set-up can be used to modify, repair or remove
components of the IPM suite. In this case, follow the online instructions
To avoid potential system resources conflicts, please shut down other
 applications before running SETUP. Some anti-Virus programs can
interfere with the installation process and may need to be shut down.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 16/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4-8 PVTP  User Guide

2.2.1 Running Setup

To install the PVTP program:


1. Insert the program installation CD in the correct drive.

2. From
online the main screen of Windows, click on |Start |Run and follow the
instructions.

The option “Repair” is recommended.

2.2.2 The PROSPER.INI file


The PROSPER initialisation file contains the settings you use to customise the PVTP 
application environment. Settings such as the program data directory, customised
units system, last file accessed and the colour settings of your screen graphics are
all stored in this file. You do not need to manually modify the PROSPER.INI file.
The program will automatically record any changes to the settings.

PVTP automatically creates the PROSPER.INI file in the Windows default directory


using the program's default settings. The location of this file is defined by this entry
in your WIN.INI file:

[PETROLEUM EXPERTS] 
IniPath=PROSPER.INI 

We do not recommend changing the location of the PROSPER.INI file. If however,


you want to do so for specific reasons (to place it on a specific network drive), take
the following steps:

1. First copy the existing PROSPER.INI file to the required directory. For
example:

COPY C:\WINDOWS\PROSPER.INI
U:\NETWORK\APPS\PVTP\PROSPER.INI

2. Next amend the 'IniPath' entry in WIN.INI to correspond to the new


directory and path where the PROSPER.INI is now located. e.g.:
IniPath=U:\NETWORK\APPS\PVTP\PROSPER.INI

During the installation PVTP unpacks a number of files onto your computer in the
specified installation directory. The unpacked files should not be modified, removed
or moved to another directory.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 17/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 2 - Installation and Windows Basics 5-8

2.3 Starting PVTP 

Before starting the program, make sure the software protection Bitlock (dongle) is
connected to your PC and that the Bitlock Driver has been installed .

2.3.1 Connecting The Software Protection Bitlock


The software protection Bitlock must be attached to the PARALLEL printer port. Do Not  
connect the Bitlock to a serial port, as this can damage the Bitlock or your PC. If you are
using protection Bitlocks for other software, we do not recommend stacking the Bitlocks.
We suggest using only the correct Bitlock with the appropriate software. Stacking Bitlocks
may lead to incompatibilities between Bitlocks, and may cause read/write or access errors
with some Bitlocks.

2.3.2 Creating the PVTP Icon

The PVTP  icon should appear automatically in the correct folder under the
Programs menu after installation.
If this does not happen, invoke the Start menu and select Settings | Taskbar.
Select the Start Menu Programs tab and click on Add to add the PVTP program to
the menu. Follow the instructions on the screen.
To start the program subsequently, select the PVTP program from the programs
menu of the Start menu.

It is also possible to create a shortcut to PVTP on the main Windows desktop. To


do this, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the desktop and select
New | Shortcut from the resulting popup menu. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the shortcut to PVTP.EXE.
PVTP can then be executed by double-clicking on the shortcut icon. 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 18/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6-8 PVTP  User Guide

2.4 REMOTE Software Utility

 All Petroleum Experts' software requires a software protection device to allow it run.
The utility program REMOTE.EXE provided with our software allows you to access
the software protection device to view information such as the enabled program
options, program expiry date(s), and Bitlock number.

You may have been sent an inactive  software device. For security, authorisation
codes are always  sent separately to the Bitlock. On receiving the software
package, we ask that you contact us to confirm reception. We will then verify the
user access code programmed on your Bitlock, and issue a set of codes to activate
the Bitlock. In these situations, the necessary codes will be sent to you by
facsimile, letter or email.

To enter the codes, you will need to run the REMOTE application installed with
PVTP (see next section for more details).
You can also create a shortcut to the Remote application from the Windows
desktop.
For this, click on |New |Short cut anywhere on the Windows screen and follow the
online instruction. The program file is called REMOTE.EXE.

2.4.1 Entering the User Authorisation Code


You enter user authorisation codes only if:


The software protection Bitlock you have received is inactive,
•  Access period for the program has expired, or
• You have acquired new program options

To enter authorisation codes take the following steps:

Double click the REMOTE icon (or select the REMOTE program from the
Programs menu of Windows 98). A screen similar to the following will appear:

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 19/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 2 - Installation and Windows Basics 7-8

Figure 2.1: 
REMOTE Software
Bitlock Utility

If your software protection Bitlock is already active, a list of enabled programs will
appear in the Remote screen as above. If PVTP  has already been enabled, no
further action is needed. If this is the case, exit the Remote Utility program now.
No user authorisation code is required.

If the code has expired or has not been enabled, the Bitlock should be activated
with the set of codes provided by Petroleum Experts. To do so, you click on the
|Update button on the bottom of the previous screen and the following screen will
appear:

Figure 2.2: 
 Authorisation Codes Entry
screen

Enter the codes from Left  to Right   beginning with the top row (you may use <Tab>
to move between the items). Press |Continue to activate the codes. You will then
be returned to the 'Remote Software Bitlock Utility' screen. If you have received
authorisation codes for more than one program, click 'Update Software Bitlock'
again, and enter the codes for the next program.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 20/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8-8 PVTP  User Guide

2.4.2 Updating the Software Protection Bitlock

 Access to the software ceases automatically when the license expiry date elapses.
You are, however, reminded several days in advance. This gives you sufficient
time to contact
updating when: Petroleum Experts about new codes. Software Bitlocks require

• The software license period has ended.


• The annual maintenance fee is due.

Software protection Bitlocks also needs updating when you acquire other
Petroleum Experts software packages. The procedure to update the Bitlock is the
same as for entering the authorisation codes. When the appropriate screen
appears, enter the codes provided - from left   to right   beginning with the top row.
Press OK to activate the codes, or Cancel   to quit the update. To view the expiry
date for any of the listed programs, simply click (highlight) the software name.

Perpetual licence holders will be sent on yearly basis an utility program


 written by Petroleum Experts, that automatically updates the Bitlock. The
update is hard-coded inside the utility program. step-by-step instructions are
sent with this utility program.

2.5 Program Check List

To ensure trouble free processing and access to the PVTP program, please check:

• You have sufficient disk space.

• The software protection Bitlock is connected to your Parallel printer port. Do


Not connect the Bitlock to the serial port, as this can damage the Bitlock or
your PC.

• The software protection Bitlock is firmly in place ensuring a good connection.


If the Bitlock is loose the program may not be able to access the dongle to
activate the program.

• The printer cable is firmly attached to the software Bitlock. Your printer should
be turned ON and be put on-line.

• The PC system date is set correctly to the current date (i.e. today's date).

• You back up your files on a regular basis with disk utility programs. This could
help to avoid the corruption of files, or help detect potential problems with your
hard disk before it is too late.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 21/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3 File Management
This section describes the menus, options and procedures used in PVT to create new files
and open or save existing files. The Units system and how to define printer settings and is
outlined. The menus described in this section are the PVT File menu and Units menu.

The File menu provides the ability to open , close , save etc. The PVT package allows
multiple files to be opened at once. The Window Menu allows the user to swap between
opened files.

This menu offers the user the standard options available from an MDI (Multi Document
Interface)

The PVT package can load multiple PVT Project Files each of which occupies its own
window.
The windows can be selected ,cascaded,arranged and tiled via this menu.

Before you can work with a file, it must be opened. This can be done using the File menu
Open option or the icon.
To protect your work, you should save your data on a regular basis. Saving a file is done
using the File menu Save or Save As options. This simple procedure could potentially
prevent hours of work and analysis being lost.

To start a new PVT Project file use the File menu New option.

3.1 PVT File Types 


PVT uses a flexible file structure that enables data to be easily exchanged between files

and other application programs.


categories: In PVT, information is grouped into the following

• PVT Project File


• Import
• Export
• Temporary
• Report

and saved into the following types of data file:

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 22/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-2 PVPT   User Guide

3.2 PVT Data Files

3.2.1 PVT Project File (*.PVI )


This is the main type of PVT package file . The information file contains all the composition

input, matching
points are shownand calculation
within the maindata
PVT for multiple streams. When opened the main data
window.

3.2.2 Extract Data (*.PVI)


This file contains the results a particular set of calculations plus the composition which
produced it. The file is produced using the Extract option within the Analysis window or
from the View properties display. When opened the file behaves in the same way as the
original PVI file from which the data was extracted

3.2.3 PVT Import


This function is accessed by using the Import option from the File menu. The selection
dialog is shown in figure 3.0.

Figure 3.0: 
Import File Type Dialog 

PVI File Import.


This imports a stream from another PVTP  *.PVI file. This option is explained in Streams -
 Adding a Stream (Chapter 5)

ASCII File Import.


Two ACII file options are available by selecting from the combo box and clicking on the
Import from ASCII file:
The types are
1. Importing a *.PRP file.
This is the file type that is produced from the Proper compositional export and the various
compositional and compositional areas in the other PETEX programs. This feature allows
the user to take this file back inito PVTP  and make a working stream with it. (see 3.1.4
Export PROSPER  EoS for more details)

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 23/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-3

2 Importing a *.EQL Data File


 A working example of an import file is contained within the PVT\SAMPLES directory with
the file name example.eql.
With time it is anticipated that there will be several import types to choose from . At present
importing is limited to a text file with the following format :

line 1
No Data Read
line 2
No Data Read
line 3
Number Of Components n (including Pseudos) <tab> Number Of Pseudo Components
line 4
No Data Read
line 4,6,.......2n+3
Component name eg. C1, CO2, C11+ (note only one name per line). See note below for
names with * 
line 5,7......2n+4
Component properties in the following order separated by tabs i.e.
mole % component <tab> Specific Gravity <tab> Boiling Point (deg C) <tab> Molecular
Weight <tab> Critical Temperature (deg C) <tab> Critical Pressure (atm) <tab > Acentric
Factor<tab> Critical Volume
Note: These values ,other than mole % , are not required at present for pure components
as they are overwritten by Petroleum Experts   Database values. However, if you wish the values
to remain , add the character * to the end of the name . Example C1* within
EXAMPLE.EQL in the samples directory. All values are preferred for Pseudos. If no Boiling
Point or SG is present (shown by 0.00 value), the missing numbers will be calculated.
line 2n+5
No Data Read

line 2n+6Read
No Data
line 2n+7 .. end-1
Component Binary Interaction Coefficients in form:
component x number <tab> component y number <tab> BI Coefficient value
line end
the end of data is marked by three 1000s separated by tabs

Once the text file is imported via the file load dialog , the PVT file must be fully initialised
by
• Clicking on the Select Components option within the Data Menu then Clicking on OK
• When the Composition Input Screen loads press Properties to bring up the Pseudo
Screen i.e if pseudos are required.
• When the Pseudo Properties display loads , press OK to calculate any missing pseudo
values.
• Press OK on the Composition Input Screen when it reappears to return to the main
display
• Save the PVT file with the required name

WARNING : if pseudo properties are not set up as described


errors will occur eg. with density calculations

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 24/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-4 PVPT   User Guide

3.2.4 PVT Export Files

3.2.5 PROSPER  EoS Composition (*.PRP)


PRP files contain the data required by the PVT section of Petroleum Experts   PROSPER 
program.

The file is produced using the Export option within View properties display or by using the
Export option from the File menu.
Select Type 1 – PROSPER  EoS Composition from the Export Types Dialog Screen
(Figure 3.1)

Figure 3.1: 
Export File Type Dialog 

Only a limited subset of the data normally associated with a PVT file is required by
PROSPER VIZ.

∗ Equation Type (SRK or Peng Robinson)


∗ Property Names and Units
∗ Composition (mole %) for each component
∗ Critical Temperature for each component
∗ Critical Pressure for each component
∗ Critical Volume for each component
∗  Acentric Factor for each component
∗ Molecular Weight for each component
∗ Specific Gravity for each component
∗ Volume Shift S Factor
∗ Parachor for each component
∗ OmegaA value for each component
∗ OmegaB value for each component
∗ Binary Interaction Coefficients for all component
combinations
∗ Separator Temperatures and Pressures are included if any have
been used to correct fluid GOR and FVF.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 25/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-5

Note: All the values exported are in field units.

3.2.6 PROSPER Hydrate Formation (*.PHY)


PHY files contain a table of temperatures and hydrate formation pressures. After
calculation the export is available from the Calculation Results dialog or from the Export

Type dialog.

3.2.7 General Data Export (*.PVE)


PVE files are files produced by the PVT General Export Function.
The ASCII text file is produced using the Export option within View properties display or
using the Export Option from the File Menu 
Select Type 2 - Petex General from the Export Types Dialog Screen (figure 3.1)
The Selection screens which follow give the user the choice of exporting any combination
of :
∗ PVT Options

∗ Primary Input Composition and BI Coefficients.


∗ Grouped/Matched Composition and BI Coefficients.
∗ Reference Data
∗ Calculations

The Calculation columns to be exported can be individually selected using the Column
Setup dialog. The data exported can be delimited by tabs or commas or alternatively saved
in a fixed-column-size format. Deselecting the saving of column headings and Keywords
will produce a file containing only numeric data. If headings are required, a comment
marker of your choice can be added to give the importing program a marker to search for.

The General Export Display is shown in figure 3.2.

Figure 3.2 
Export File
Dialog 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 26/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-6 PVPT   User Guide

The dialog gives the user great flexibility in what should be exported and in what format.
The export is to an ASCII file with a default extension of .PVE
For each section of Input Data or results a check-box allows the user to switch on or off its
export .

The available sections are:

Input Data 
Included are all the entries made on the PVT Options screen i.e. Method, Analyst, Well etc.

Input Composition
This is component concentrations and properties of the mixture prior to any grouping or
regression exported in tabular form. The currently selected Stream will be exported at this
point.

BI Coefficients.
The initial values for Binary Interaction Coefficients are exported in a symmetrical table. 

Grouped/Matched Composition
This is component concentrations and properties of the mixture after Grouping or
Regression exported in tabular form.

Grouped/Matched BI Coefficients.
The Grouped/Matched values for Binary Interaction Coefficients are exported in a
symmetrical table.

Reference Data
This option will export the Reference Temperature, Pressure and depth.

Calculations
When the dialog is loaded, the listbox within this section displays all the calculations which
may be exported.
 A checkbox allows all calculation exporting to be switched on or off.
Highlighted Calculation names will be exported. Clicking on the calculation name within the
listbox will select or de-select the item.
The variables within each calculation can be individually selected using the Layout option.

Delimiting
The data exported can be delimited by tabs  or commas  or alternatively saved in a fixed-
column-size  format. Enter the column width in the edit box if the fixed-column-size option
is required.

Headings and Comments


Deselecting the saving of column headings and Keywords will produce a file containing
only numeric data. If headings are required a comment marker of your choice can be
added to give the importing program a marker to search for. Erasing the comment marker
editbox contents will give headings without an added character.

When all the selections have been made click on the Export control button to bring up the
file save dialog. A file extension of .PVE is taken as default, but any legitimate file name
can be used.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 27/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-7

Layout
The Layout screen (shown in figure 3.3) is the same as used in all the calculations (chapter
8 ).Each selected calculation will be shown as a separate dilaogue within which individual
values can be selected.

Figure 3.3 
Column
Setup
Dialog 

To select or de-select a value click on the checkbox beside its name.

To remove all selections for a particular calculation click on the Hide All button.

To export all columns click on the All button above the listbox.

When all column selections have been made click on OK .

Clicking on Cancel will shut down the display , ignoring any selections which have been
made.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 28/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-8 PVPT   User Guide

3.2.8 Black Oil Tables (*.PTB)


PTB files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into the
PVT/BlackOil/Tables section of Petroleum Experts   PROSPER  program. The format is fairly
general and could be used for other packages.
 An ASCII text file is produced by this procedure. The process is carried out using the
Export option within View properties display or using the Export Option from the File Menu 

Select Type 3 -Black Oil Table from the Export Types Dialog Screen (figure 3.1)

The Selection screens which follow give the user the choice of exporting any combination
of the following Black Oil related variables:

∗ Pressure
∗ Gas to Oil Ratio(GOR)
∗ Oil FVF
∗ Oil Viscosity


Oil Density
Oil Z Factor
∗ Gas FVF
∗ Gas Viscosity
∗ Gas Z Factor
∗ Gas Density
∗ Condensate to Gas Ratio (CGR)
∗ Vapour CGR
∗ Water viscosity
∗ Water Z Factor

 A typical dialog is shown in figure 1.2a.

Note :
The column values can be calculated for each pressure entry. If the Saturation Pressure is
not included in the list within the table it is calculated and inserted when Export is selected.
The varables to be exported are selected using the list box on the right of the display. At
least one variable should be chosen. At the time of export the program checks if a selected
table has any valid data for the chosen columns. If none exists the table is ignored.

Selecting for MBAL/PROSPER  

This feature has been added to assist in the transfer of the correct columns to MBAL's or
PROSPER's table import facility.

To use this option


 Select the target program using the combo box provided
 then select the type of fluid (defined in MBAL's or Proper's OPTIONS) using the radio
buttons

finally click on the Select  button. This automatically sets the required variables for
export.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 29/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-9

Figure 3.2a 
Black Oil Table
Export 

The Calculations are set out in a series of 10 tables. Each table has a temperature and up
to 100 pressures.

 All the table variables except water viscosity and water Z factor can be calculated
automatically from the minimum inputs of Temperature and Pressure.

The calculation ,which is carried out by pressing on Calc. Table or Calculate All , consists
of a Saturation Pressure estimation followed by a Constant Composition Expansion (CCE).
The values will be the same as those reported for the CCE option within the PVT package
Calculation menu. The saturation pressure is placed in the edit box at the top of the table.
The other values are placed within the table. All values can also be entered manually.
Water viscosity and water Z factor must be entered manually. Click in cell, enter the
required number and click away.

The tab section at the bottom of the display shows which tables have been fillTm (r 49 1093.6 3

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 30/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-10 PVPT   User Guide

Separator Data
In common with the CCE calculation (Section 8.4) , the Table Export displays contains a
section for Separator Data. This allows the user to define a 5-stage separator train through
which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF  and GOR. The processes which
are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil
characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.

 All stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always
included.

The Used checkbox within the separator data area switches the correction on and off. The
Setup button allows the stage characteristics to be changed by calling the dialog shown in
figure 3.2b.

Figure 3.2b 
Black Oil Table
Export- Separator
Correction 

The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those
within the Separator calculation. The SEP COPY button will copy the first five stages from
the Separator Calculation ( Section 8.8 ) into the Separator Data area.The CLEAR  button
removes all values from within the Separator Data area. OK  will reurn to the Export Table
dialog with any changes stored. Cancel  will reurn to the Export Table dialog with any
changes ignored.

Export
When the data required has been entered and/or calculated, the variables selected can be
exported by clicking the Export button. This brings up a small dialog which allows the user
to select the table or tables to export (figure 3.2c).

Figure 3.2c 
Black-Oil Table
Export-Table
Selection 

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 31/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-11

This dialog gives the user the ability to select one ,all, or a range of tables to export. If   
Range of Tables  is chosen the range required should be entered in the editboxes
provided.
Note:  the program will ignore empty tables or any which are found not to contain data of
the required type.
When the tables have been chosen press Export  to bring up the file selection dialog as
shown in figure 3.2d. The default file extension is .PTB
 
Figure 3.2d 
Black Oil Table
Export- File Selection

For each section of Input Data or results a check-box allows the user to switch on or off its
export .

 A typical export file is shown below:

*
** Petroleum Experts - PVT Black Oil Export File
*Version 2
*
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
*

* The export of data is done always in Field units.


* The target program will adjust to the internally selected units.

* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! PVT FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!


* PVT FILE NAME : C:\PVTp_Files\Samples\EXAMPLE2.PVI
* Exported :Tue Jul 01 14:19:39 2003
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

* NUMBER OF TABLES (MAX 10)


2

* DATA COLUMN IDENTIFIERS


* - CAN BE IN ANY ORDER
* - COLUMNS CAN BE MISSING
* - ANY INDIVIDUAL ITEM > 3.4e35 = missing item
*
*
* PRES - Pressure
* GOR - Gas-Oil Ratio
* OFVF - oil Formation Volume Factor
* OVIS - oil Viscosity
* ODEN - oil Density
* OCOM - oil Compressibility
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* GVIS - gas Viscosity

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 32/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 33/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-13

The ASCII file contains many comments maked with * to help the user.
The IMPORT funtion ,however, requies the following information
◊ the number of tables to be read


the
for variables exported
each table :table PRES GOR etc. of entries,table temperature and saturation
number,number
pressure
◊ for each entry the variables selected separated by a space

Important Note on Units


The values transferred between the programs are done in field units Conversion to the user
unit is done on IMPORT.

Calc. Table  and  Calculate All


When Calculate All is selected, the saturation pressure and CCE calculation will be
carried out on all tables which contain a valid table temperature and on any table line with a
valid pressure. Calc. Table is done on the viewed table only

Clear Table  and  Clear All


When Clear All is selected, and the clear is confirmed all table data is removed.
Clear Table operates on the viewed table only.

Copy CCE
When Copy CCE is selected, and the copy is confirmed, all table data is removed. The
table temperatures and pressures are replaced by those from within the CCE  calculation
user- defined input screen (section 8.4).

Clear
This option closes down the dialog and saves the values entered but does not evoke the
export to file.

3.2.9 MBAL MultiI-PVT Export (*.PGD)


PTG files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into the
PVT/Fluid Properties/Import section of Petroleum Experts   MBAL  program. The MBAL  program
should have the tank model Variable PVT selected.

 The formattext
An ASCII is fairly
file general and could
is produced beprocedure.
by this used for other
Thepackages.
process is carried out using the
Export option within View properties display or using the Export Option from the File Menu.

The first stage in the export process is to calculate the Compositional gradient via a
variation of the Compositional Gradient Calculation Input Dialog (see figure 3.2e).

The only difference is a change of label on the button from Calc to Export. 
Input the depths or range of depths required and press on Export.. This brings up the
Export dialog.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 34/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-14 PVPT   User Guide

Figure 3.2e 
MBAL
MultiPVT
Export 

Click on Calc  to fill in the table as shown in figure 3.2f.. The reference data used can be
changed using the edit boxes above the main table.
The program will calculate the compositional gradient for the selected depths.
When this has been completed,the program uses the compositions at each depth to make
up a black oil match table.for each depth.
The pressures used to define the Black Oil flashes are automatically selected with respect
to the saturation pressure.
5 pressures , including the saturation pressure are used. The data produced can be viewed
via the MBAL Match Data dialog.. This display is called by clicking on one of the Match

Data  buttons in columnpressures


The automatically-set 1. can be modified manually in this dialog and the Black Oil
properties re-calculated. The check box in column 2 indictes whether the pressures have
been modified.
When the data has been set click on Export  to create the ASCII file.This action brings up
the file selection dialog as shown in figure 3.2d. The default file extension is .PGD 

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 35/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-15

 
Figure 3.2f  
MBAL  Export
File Selection

Analysis allows the user to view the compositions calculated for each depth. See Analysis
Dialog within the Calculations Chapter for more details.
The calculation results can be viewed graphically using the Plot  option. See the Plot
Chapter for the options available within plots .
Click on Main to exit the dialog and return to the summary display.

Figure 3.2f  
MultiPVt Export
Calculation 

Important Note on Units


The values transferred between the programs are done in field units Conversion to the user
unit is done on IMPORT.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 36/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-16 PVPT   User Guide

3.2.10 MBAL  PVT with Depth - Black Oil Match Tables


This dialog is called by clicking on any of the MatchData buttons within the MBAL  export
table (See figure 3.2f). A typical example is shown in figure 3.2g

Figure 3.2g 
MultiPVt Black
Oil Match Table

The table is the result of 5 flashes on a composition at a particular depth. The aim is to
provide the data necessary for matching the Black Oil Model. The program automatically
selects the pressures as

1 0ne third of saturation pressure


2 Two thirds of saturation pressure
3 Saturation pressure
4 Seven sixths of saturation pressure
5 Four thirds of saturation pressure

The aim is to provide enough data to give the shape of the particuar Black Oil correlation
above and below the Saturation Pressure.
If the selected points are found to be unsuitable the values above and below can be
adjusted by:

a) Putting the table into Manual mode using the radio buttons provided
b) Entering new values for pressure in the white boxes within the table
c) Click on the Calc. Button

Exit will close the dialog and retain the values

Cancel will close the dialog with any changes ignored.

Plot allows the user to view the shape of th Black Oil curves .

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 37/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-17

NOTE 
 Any recalculation of the underlying MBAL PVT with depth table will invalidate and remove
any manually entered pressures.

 A typical export file is shown below:


*
* Petroleum Experts -  MBAL PVT with Depth Export File
*
*
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
* - ANY INDIVIDUAL ITEM VALUE > 3.4e35 = missing item
*
* UNITS for each data item are assumed to be whatever is the current
* setting at the time of export
*
*Export File Signature
PetexPGD
*Export File Version
1
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! PVT FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* PVT FILE NAME : C:\HAMID\AX.PVI
* Exported :Sun Feb 08 17:02:49 1998
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

* DATA COLUMN IDENTIFIERS


*
*
* DPTH - Depth
* PRES - Pressure
* TEMP - Temperature
* PSAT - Bubble/Dew Point Pressure
* GOR - Gas-Oil Ratio
* OAPI - Oil Gravity
* GGRV - Gas Gravity
* WSAL - Water Salinity
* MH2S - Mole H2S
* MCO2 - Mole CO2
* MN2 - Mole 2
* OFVF - oil Formation Volume Factor
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* OVIS - oil Viscosity
* GVIS - gas Viscosity
* ZLIQ - oil Compressibility
* ZVAP - gas Compressibility
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* CGR - produced cgr
*
**************** DEPTH TABLE VARIABLES EXPORTED ****************
DPTH ,PRES ,TEMP ,PSAT ,GOR ,OAPI ,GGRV ,WSAL ,MH2S ,MC02 ,MN2 ,
****************************************************************

**************** MATCHDATA TABLE VARIABLES EXPORTED ****************


PRES ,GOR ,OFVF ,OVIS ,GVIS ,ZLIQ ,ZVAP ,GFVF ,CGR ,
********************************************************************

********************** UNITS *****************************

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 38/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-18 PVPT   User Guide


* Units Used in Depth Table Variables:-
*feet ,psig ,degrees F ,psig ,scf/STB ,API , , , , , , ,
* Units Used in MatchData Variables:-
*psig ,RB/STB ,centipoise ,centipoise , , ,ft3/scf ,bbls/MMscf ,
********************************************************************

********************** DATA *****************************


* NUMBER OF DEPTHS
7

* Reference Depth in feet


9369
* Reference Pressure in psig
3280
* Reservoir Temperature in degrees F
240
* Temperature Gradient in deg F/100 ft
1.8
*Data no 1 at Depth 8869 feet
8869 ,3220.42 ,231.003 ,2980.33 ,17528.4 ,59.6764 ,0.756737 ,0 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,0.00906007 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
993.433 ,396.508 ,1.34781 ,0.138438 ,0.0141965 ,0.334204 ,0.898412 ,0.0174201 ,53.706 ,
1986.9 ,1109.68 ,1.79818 ,0.0946761 ,0.0175569 ,0.552108 ,0.842573 ,0.00822854 ,42.6687 ,
2980.33 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0254712 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.814226
,0.00531417 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3477.05 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0286318 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.842439
,0.00471613 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3973.76 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0316125 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.876937
,0.00429788 ,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 2 at Depth 9035.67 feet


9035.67 ,3237.14 ,234.002 ,3048.63 ,1.234568e+038 ,59.7848 ,0.763556 ,0 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,0.00887868 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1016.2 ,409.348 ,1.36064 ,0.135219 ,0.0142724 ,0.33949 ,0.896489 ,0.0170727 ,62.0198 ,
2032.43 ,1155.64 ,1.83571 ,0.0916819 ,0.017834 ,0.560222 ,0.840694 ,0.00806241 ,50.1091 ,
3048.63 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0266022 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.811896
,0.0052033 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3556.74 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0299055 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.843699
,0.00463785 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4064.83 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0329984 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.881508
,0.00424217 ,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 3,3254.66
9202.33 at Depth 9202.33 feet,3130.92 ,13072.7 ,59.9214 ,0.772361 ,0 ,1.234568e+038
,237.001
,1.234568e+038 ,0.00863199 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1043.63 ,426.478 ,1.37682 ,0.131639 ,0.0143599 ,0.345723 ,0.893948 ,0.0166547 ,74.6633 ,
2087.29 ,1216.41 ,1.88403 ,0.0883227 ,0.0181829 ,0.569793 ,0.838169 ,0.00786225 ,61.9258 ,
3130.92 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0282337 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.808286
,0.00506646 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3652.75 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0317214 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.845046
,0.00454321 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4174.56 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0349646 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.887356
,0.00417645 ,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 4 at Depth 9369 feet


9369 ,3280 ,240 ,3279.88 ,4316.35 ,60.7132 ,0.834684 ,0 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.0065
,

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 39/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-19

* Number of MatchData Lines


5
1093.28 ,483.188 ,1.42496 ,0.124293 ,0.0144985 ,0.354491 ,0.884976 ,0.0158165 ,273.857 ,
2186.6 ,1358.06 ,1.99025 ,0.0827284 ,0.0188862 ,0.585908 ,0.831526 ,0.00748011 ,316.012 ,
3279.88 ,4316.35 ,4.11191 ,0.0464585 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.76052 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,
3826.53 ,4316.35 ,3.87211 ,0.0513914 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.834998 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4373.17 ,4316.35 ,3.69423 ,0.0561634 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.910005 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 5 at Depth 9535.67 feet


9535.67 ,3306.98 ,242.999 ,3168.36 ,3380.86 ,60.8218 ,0.847811 ,0 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,0.00597958 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1056.11 ,455.891 ,1.41045 ,0.125053 ,0.0144333 ,0.345564 ,0.888033 ,0.0164925 ,360.764 ,
2112.25 ,1249.86 ,1.9233 ,0.085132 ,0.0184277 ,0.574194 ,0.83661 ,0.00782229 ,453.442 ,
3168.36 ,3380.86 ,3.40831 ,0.0518623 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.743622 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3696.42 ,3380.86 ,3.23817 ,0.0571572 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.823709 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4224.47 ,3380.86 ,3.10936 ,0.0623314 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.903482 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 6 at Depth 9702.33 feet


9702.33 ,3336.35 ,245.998 ,3100.22 ,3017.7 ,60.8607 ,0.853655 ,0 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,0.00574032 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1033.4 ,437.28 ,1.40159 ,0.125082 ,0.0144059 ,0.340151 ,0.890203 ,0.0169632 ,408.444 ,
2066.82 ,1185.27 ,1.88612 ,0.0862731 ,0.0181776 ,0.567039 ,0.84003 ,0.00805995 ,532.838 ,
3100.22 ,3017.7 ,3.1531 ,0.0543352 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.734882 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,
3616.92 ,3017.7 ,3.00609 ,0.0597755 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.816837 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,
4133.61 ,3017.7 ,2.89377 ,0.0651067 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.898189 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,

*Data no 7 at Depth 9869 feet


9869 ,3366.84 ,248.997 ,3045.5 ,2779.84 ,60.884 ,0.857745 ,0 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,0.00556968 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1015.16 ,421.808 ,1.39481 ,0.124852 ,0.0143902 ,0.335786 ,0.892026 ,0.0173724 ,445.867 ,
2030.35 ,1134.7 ,1.85835 ,0.0870026 ,0.0179929 ,0.561257 ,0.84289 ,0.00826661 ,596.749 ,
3045.5 ,2779.84 ,2.99245 ,0.0560421 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.728205 ,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,
3553.09 ,2779.84 ,2.85924 ,0.0615715 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.811196 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4060.66 ,2779.84 ,2.75683 ,0.0669972 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.893412 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,

********************** END *****************************

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 40/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-20 PVPT   User Guide

3.2.11 MBAL Variable Bubble Point(Oil) Export (*.PVB)


PVB files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into the
PVT/Fluid Properties/Import section of Petroleum Experts   MBAL  program.
PVB files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into the
PVT/Fluid Properties/Import section of Petroleum Experts   MBAL  program. The MBAL program
should have the tank model Variable PVT selected.
The format is fairly general and could be used for other packages.
 An ASCII text file is produced by this procedure. The process is carried out using the
Export option within View properties display or using the Export Option from the File Menu.

This display is initiated by selecting the Type 5 -MBAL Variable Bubble Pt. (Oil)  option
from the Export Types Dialog Screen.
The objective is to provide a full black oil map for reinjecting gas into a dead oil to provide a
range of fluids with differing Bubble Points.
The dialog is split into 2 fluid types

3.2.12 Saturated
These tables represent the oils properties at various saturation pressures. Data entry can
be done for any of five temperatures.
If the table pressure is below the oils uninjected bubble point a straightforward CCE
calculation is done to the table temperature and pressure. The oils black oil properties are
then calculated and reported.
If the pressure is above the uninjected bubble point the following procedure is undertaken
by the program:
The oil is flahed to standard conditions to calculate a dead oil and associated gas
composition
The dead oil composition is mixed with a range of proportions of gas to get a curve of
addition amount versus bubble point.
The required amount of injected gas to achieve the input pressure is estimated.
The estimated gas fraction is mixed with the dead oil and this combination is taken through
a CCE to get the fluid's blackoil properties. The fraction of gas used is reported within the
 Analysis Dialog.

3.2.13 Undersaturated
These tables represent the oils properties at pressures above the saturation pressure. For
any of five temperatures.,there are five bubble points. Theses bubble points represent

different
pressure mixtures
matchingof compositions
dead oil and gas. Thesimilar
is very procedure followed
to that to achive
outlined these
for the saturation
SATURATED
table.Once the composition is determined this fluid is flashed at the table temperature and
the range of input pressures to caculate the oils density ,viscosity and FVF.

The data entry for the dialog is available in two forms i.e Automatic and User Selected.
 A typical Automatic display is shown in figure 3.2h.

The table temperature is entered via the edit box provided. A set of radio buttons in the top
right of the display allows the user to move between the five saturated tables.Table
temperatures must be different.
The labelled TABS allow selection between displaying the Saturated and Under saturated
data.
In automatic mode the user can enter an individual pressure range for each temperature. If
the entries are to be repeated the Copy Pressures,Paste  and Paste All buttons can be

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 41/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-21

used to make the data entry easier. The Copy Pressures stores the pressure range
entered. The Paste button will overwrite the current table entries with the stored values.
The Paste All feature will overwrite all pressure ranges whether saturated or
undersaturated with the stored values. If any of the pressure entries contradicts the other
defined variables i.e. an undersaturated PSAT the user will be informed and the values
adjusted.

Figure 3.2h 
MBAL  Variable
PB Input Dialog 

Clicking on the User Selected radio button changes the display one similar to that in figure
3.2i.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 42/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-22 PVPT   User Guide

The user can now enter up to 50 individual pressures for each temperature.
Every SATURATED table must have at least one associated UNDERSATURATED entry.
Clicking on the Under saturated TAB brings up a display like that in figure 3.2j in User
Selected mode:

Figure 3.2i 
MBAL  Variable
PB Input Dialog 

The associated Saturation Table Temperature is displayed. For this temperature up to five
Bubble Points can be defined. For each Bubble Point the program will create a fluid of
dead oil and injected gas. This composition will then be flashed to all the pressures
defined. The required Saturation Pressure is entered using the editbox provided. The user
can move between the five under saturated tables by way of the 5 radio buttons in the top
right corner. The pressure entries must be equal to or above the PSAT defined for the
table. As with the saturated tables all the pressure entries are independent of each other. A
similar automatic mode entry is provided.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 43/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-23

Figure 3.2j 
MBAL  Variable
PB Input Dialog

Separator Data
The display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the user to define a
separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF  and
GOR. The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
 All stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always
included.

The checkbox within the separator data area switches the correction on and off.
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those
within the Separator calculation. The SEP COPY  button will copy the first five stages from
the Separator Calculation into the Separator Data area.The CLEAR  button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
Once a range of entries have been made for the Saturated and Undersaturated table have
been made proceed to the Calculation and Export Dialog.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 44/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-24 PVPT   User Guide

To bring up the Calculation and Export Dialog click on the Calc control button.

Exit stores the entries made and returns to Summary Screen

Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen

Clear removes a table or all table entries.

Volume Shift
 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off
this feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more
details.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 45/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-25

3.3 MBAL  Variable Bpt. Calculation Dialog


This display is initiated by selecting the Calc option from the Export MBAL Variable
Bubble Point display.
 A typical starting display would be:

Figure 3.2k 
MBAL  Variable
PB Calculation
Dialog 

Clicking on the TABS allows the user to move between the Saturated and Undersaturated
results tables.

Click on Calc to fill in the calculated properties for all tables.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 46/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-26 PVPT   User Guide

The display becomes:

Figure 3.2l 
MBAL  Variable
PB Calculation
Dialog 

When the data has been set click on Export to create the ASCII file.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 47/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-27

Analysis  allows the user to view the compositions calculated for each combination of P

and T. See
Where Analysis
applicable theDialog help
display willfor more
show details.
the percentage of dead oil put into the composition
eg. for saturated points above the original oil bubble point the display might look like this:

Figure 3.2m 
MBAL  Variable
PB Analysis
Dialog 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 48/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-28 PVPT   User Guide

The calculation results can be viewed graphically using the Plot option. See Plot Help .
When the variable is common to both saturated and undersaturated tables the plot shows
both cuves eg. oil FVF:

Figure 3.2n 
MBAL  Variable
PB Plot 

Click on Main to exit the dialog and return to the summary display.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 49/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-29

3.3.1 Eclipse Type Export (*.INC)


INC files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into an Eclipse
Blackoil Simulator.
The process is initiated by selecting the 6 – Eclipse(Black Oil) Format  option from the

Export
The Typesallows
display Dialogthe
Screen.
user to calculate phase properties and export them in a variety of
standard Eclipse formats.

The export is to an ASCII file with a default extension of .INC .


Since not all Eclipse or even PVT data is available within this file, it has beeen assumed
that the file will be edited by the user and "included" in the Eclipse input file.

The export is on the basis of a single stream (see Streams Help) at a single temperature.
The temperature is assumed initially to be the Reservoir Temperature , but it can be
changed within the Eclipse Setup dialog.Multiple temperature files can be produced by
merging several individual export files.
The stream is selected via the listbox at the top of the dialog.
The calculations are carried out over a range of pressures for each of the three phases
VIZ. Oil,Gas and Water. Each has an independent range setting.
Eclipse allows for a variety of PVT data types ,indicated by selection of Keywords. The
Eclipse documentationl should be used as a reference on how these types are depicted
and used.

Figure 3.2o 
Eclipse
Export Utility 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 50/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-30 PVPT   User Guide

This dialog has a combobox for each phase .The options include:

OIL 
 No Oil
 Oil with Dissolved Gas PVCO + PMAX or PVTO
 Undersaturated Oil with Constant Dissolved Gas PVDO (+ RSCONST)
 Constant Oil with Dry Gas RVCONST

GAS 
 No Gas
 Wet Gas with Vapourised Oil PVTG
 Dry Gas PVDG
 Dry Gas with Constant Vapourised Oil PVDG (+ RVCONST)
 Constant Gas with Undersaturated Oil RSCONST

OIL 
 No Water

Water included PVTW
The keywords selected are shown at the bottom of the dialog. With the Oil with Dissolved
Gas option the checboxes can be used to select between the PVCO + PMAX and PVTO 
options

NOTE on UNITS 
Note that Eclipse has less unit options than PVTP. It is up to the user to output in units
which match the rest of the Eclipse input file. The units dialog can be used to make any
changes required

To proceed to the next stage of the exporting process click on the Export button

Clear sets all options off

Exit saves the current selections and closes down the dialog

Cancel  closes down the dialog without saving any selection changes.

3.3.2 Eclipse Export Setup Dialog


This display is initiated by selecting Export from the Eclipse Export Utility dialog. The
display allows the user to setup the temperature and pressures which will be used to
calculate and susequently export data to file.

The calculation will be caried out at a single temperature. This is initially set at the
Reservoir Temperature but it can be changed using the Edit box shown above.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 51/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-31

Note
The calculation done on each phase is a Constant Composition Expansion (CCE). This a
flash process where all the products are retained i.e. the total amount of each component
at the initial conditions is the same at all the measured values, only the phase splits (K
values ) have been changed.If however a dead oil or dry gas option is chosen eg. PVDO or

PVGO , the
removed composition
prior willthe
to performing berequied
flashedP,T
to standard
flashes. conditions and the excess gas or oil

Separator Data
In a similar way to the CCE input this display contains a section for Separator Data. This
allows the user to define a separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to
correct the Oil FVF  and GOR. The processes which are used to return an oil to standard
conditions can significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas
liberated on the way.

 All stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always
included.
The checkbox within the separator data area switches the correction on and off.
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those
within the Separator calculation. The SEP COPY  button will copy the first five stages from
the Separator Calculation into the Separator Data area.The CLEAR  button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.

This display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected 
and Automatic modes.
In Automatic  the pressure entries look like this. The phase entries are independent of
each other. If a phase has not been requested within the Export Utility the edit boxes for
that phase are hidden.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 52/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-32 PVPT   User Guide

Figure 3.2p 
Eclipse
Export Setup 

In the User Selected version the ranged input is replaced by a grid for each phase where
any mixture of pressures can be entered. Select each phase by clicking on the tab at the
bottom of the grid.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 53/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-33

Figure 3.2q 
Eclipse
Export Setup 

Additional Inputs 

Where additional information is required i.e PMAX ,RSCONST and RVCONST. the
appropriate edit box will appear in this area

 All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Eclipse Export Tables dialog

To bring up the Eclipse Export Tables dialog click on the Export control button.

Exit will store all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 54/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-34 PVPT   User Guide

Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen

Clear removes any entered values

Volume Shift
 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off
this feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup (Section 4.2.3)
for more details.

3.3.3 Eclipse Export Tables


This dialog allows the user to initiate calculations and view the results

Figure 3.2r  
Eclipse
Export
Tables 

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 55/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-35

The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Export button is pressed on the Eclipse Export
Setup Dialog.
The display is in the form of a three tables , one for each phase, with input values on the
left and the required calculation variables calculations listed in columns on the right.
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading.

Scroll
If the bars arehave
values provided
beentoalready
show more variables
calculated theand results.
display will show the last set of values
calculated.
To the right of each table is a calculated stock tank density for each phase. This is
calculated even if the phase is absent from the setup options. When all three densities are
present , they are added to the export file under the DENSITY keyword as shown below:

DENSITY
52.6231 62.4562 0.0642391 /
-- units (lb/ft3)

The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:
Export

This option brings up the file selection dialog as shown below. Selecting a file name with
the extension .INC and pressing OK will automatically produce the required ASCII file.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 56/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 57/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-37

3.3.4 Eclipse Compositional Export (*.PVO)


The objective is to provide an ASCII file which is compatible with an Eclipse 300 PVT input.
The file is exported as a PVO type including matched composition and properties.
 As an option the file can also contain water properties for a range of pressures.

ThisExport
the display is initiated
Types Dialog by selecting the 7 -Eclipse (Compositional) Format option from
Screen.

 A typical dialog would be as follows:

Figure 3.3 
Eclipse
Export
Dialog 

Two types of unit system are provided i.e. Field and Metric. When loaded the dialog will
select the system which best matches the reservoir temperature unit. Later , however, this
selection can be changed using the radio buttons provided.
If water PVT is required , enter the range and number of pressures required, change the
water salinity to the desired value and click on the Include Water Properties checkbox.
 A combo box allows the desired stream to be selected.
Clicking on the Export button brings up the file selection dialog. Select a name for the PVO
file and click on save.

Figure 3.3 
Eclipse
Export
File
Dialog 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 58/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-38 PVPT   User Guide

3.3.5 PVT Temporary Files

3.3.5.1 Temporary Data File (*.PSV)


This file is created at various point within the program, particularly after regression
operations, to hold intermediate results. The file is not automatically deleted when a normal
PVI file is closed. If a normal PVI file becomes unreadable , it is possible to rename the
PSV file as PVI and use it instead.

3.4 File Operations

3.4.1 Creating a New File


While working with PVT, new input or output data files can be created at any time. To
create new file, from the File menu choose the New command.
This command does not actually create a new and separate file, but reinitialises the
program input/output data. The next step would be to choose the compositional model etc.
by selecting Options from the Options menu..

3.4.2 Opening an Existing File

Existing
session. data files can
To open be from
a file, opened
thequickly and choose
File menu easily atthe
anyOpen
time option.
during the current working
Alternatively, press
the left-hand mouse button while the pointer is over the file-open icon within the PVT
toolbar.

The list box within the file-open dialog gives the following options:

•  All PVT files (*.PV*)


• Data files (*.PVI)

The program displays a dialog box in which the files matching your selection criteria are
listed in alphabetic order. The default data directory files are automatically displayed first.
To open a file, point and click the filename to recall and press ↵  or click on OK The
alternative method of opening a file is to double-click on the file name. If the file you want
is not listed, it is possible that:

1) it is in a different sub directory


2) it is on a different drive
3) it is of a different file type.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 59/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-39

3.4.3 Saving a File

When files are opened in PVT, the program copies the selected file into the computer's
memory. Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In the event of a power
failure or computer crash, these changes would be completely lost. To prevent this, we
recommend you save your data on a regular basis and especially before quitting the
program.

The Save command stores all the changes made in the current active file. By default, the
Save command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last
selected. If the file is new, you will be prompted to enter a name and select a target
directory:
When exiting the program the user will be prompted to close any files which have been
altered during the session and not saved.

3.4.4 Copying a File


The Save As command allows you to make more than one copy or version of an existing
file. With this command, you can save a file under the same name but to a different drive,
or under a different name on the same drive. Before saving a copy to another disk, we
recommend the file is first saved on your hard disk!  

The program displays a dialog box listing all the current files that match your selection
criteria. Your default data directory is automatically displayed first. To copy a file, enter a
new name in the Filename field - up to eight characters are allowed. Select a different
directory or drive if desired, then press ↵ or click on OK.

3.4.5 Closing Files


The CLOSE command removes the currently-displayed file and all its data from memory. If
the file has been changed the user is prompted to save the file contents before closure.
The Close All command removes every file that has been loaded.
The Delete Calculation Results Command leaves the file composition data in place but
removes the results of any calculations that have taken place.

3.4.6 Restore Temp File


 A temporary file with the extension *.PSV is created at various point within the program,
particularly after regression operations, to hold intermediate results. The file is
automatically deleted when a normal PVI file is closed. If , however, there is a computer or
software failure during further processing , this command can be used to recover lost data.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 60/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-40 PVPT   User Guide

3.5 Software Key Maintenance

3.5.1 Viewing the Software Key


The Dongle command activates the REMOTE software utility program that allows you to
read the software protection key. This facility lets you see what programs are currently
enabled, their expiry date, user authorisation codes and key number. This utility is also
used to update the software key. Software keys must be updated when new programs or
modules are required or the key expiry date changed. Section 2.3 describes how to use the
REMOTE utility.

3.6 Printing

3.6.1 Printer Set-up


Once you have selected a printer using the Windows Control Panel and selected the
appropriate set-up options, printing reports is straightforward. When you are ready to print,
always verify your printer is plugged in, on-line and connected to your machine. The
Printer Set-up command of the File menu, allows you to change the printer set-up options.
The setup can also be changed from the Report Print Dialog Screen.

 As all printers have varying printing capabilities, the dialog box that appears will correspond
with the printer selected. Most printers allow you to select paper size and source, page
orientation and number of copies. The set-up screen example that follows is for a Canon
LBP III laser printer.

Figure 3.5: 
Printer Set-up Options 

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 61/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-41

3.6.2 Printing a Report


Prior to printing a report, it is always a good idea to save your data file(s). In the unlikely
event that a printer error or some other unforeseen problem occurs, this simple procedure
could prevent your work being lost.

To print a report, select the Reporting/Report menu option. Select the sections you wish to
report on the dialog box. The program will lead you through a series of input screens to set
up the required report sections. From the main dialog box, select a destination for your
report. Details of how to set up a report are given in Section

Figure

3.6: 
Reports 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 62/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-42 PVPT   User Guide

3.7 Units System


This section describes the system of units. The built in flexibility of the units system
enables you to select any variable and define the unit of measurement to be used. This
feature makes it possible to modify the units system so that it corresponds to data reports
supplied by a service company or customise the units system to suit your own personal
preferences.
PVTP  always works internally in Field units.. To facilitate data entry and output display in
any units system, PVTP  accepts data in the specified Input units and converts it to Field
units for calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted back to the specified Output
unit set if necessary. By making selections from the different categories, you can work in
the units you prefer and save the results in the units required by company policy.

The changes made to the units system are file specific, each holding its own unit set. The
program allows you to create your own units system. To access the units system, point to
the Units menu and click the mouse, or click on the icon shown above.

To access the units system, point to the Units menu and click the mouse. Alternatively ,
point to the units icon on the PVT toolbar and click the mouse.

The following screen will appear:

Figure 3.7: 
Units Definition 

3.7.1 Unit Options


The Units Menu is divided into two main sections:

3.7.2 Variables
Select any item from the list of variables displayed. To select an item, move the scroll box
up or down, until the required variable appears on the screen.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 63/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 3 - File Management 3-43

3.7.3 Validation
Used to set up the error checking limits for each selected input variable.

3.7.4 Unit Systems


The following default Units Systems are provided:

• Oilfield Units
• Norwegian S.I.
• Canadian S.I.
• German S.I.
• French S.I.
• Latin S.I.

Customised unit systems can be created and saved under new names. Different units can
be selected for both input and output.

3.7.5 Changing the Units


The Input and Output units for each variable on the list can be changed.
To change or customise the default Units System:
• Scroll through the measurement variables list until the unit item to modify is visible on
the screen.
• Select the unit category (Input and/or Output) to modify.
• Select the unit field corresponding to the measurement item and click on the arrow to
its right to display the list of unit options. 
• Select the preferred measurement unit.

3.7.6 Validation Limits


To reduce the possibility of entering incorrect data, PVTP checks that input data falls within
predetermined validation limits. For most purposes, the default validation limits are
adequate. For particular applications, the user can change the validation limits if required
by entering new values directly from the units definition screen.

Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, then enter required changes in the

lowuse.
in and high validation limit
To permanently boxes.
attach theEnter
new your custom
validation validation
limits limits inunits
to a custom the units currently
system, click
Save before leaving the validation screen by clicking OK.

To save changes, click Save. You will be prompted to enter a name for the new Units
System. This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file. The ability to have
separate input and output unit systems allows the user to work with familiar units and to
create reports in any required unit system. PVT calculates internally in Oilfield Units.  

If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PVT session, the
changes will be written into the .PVI file when the input data are saved. Irrespective of the
current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .PVI file will cause PVT to revert
to the units saved in the recalled .PVI file. To permanently impose a new set of units on
the recalled file, open a custom units file (or use one of the internal unit sets) and then
save the .PVI file. The new units settings will be used whenever the .PVI file is loaded.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 64/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

3-44 PVPT   User Guide

3.8 Command Buttons


The following command buttons are used in PVT.

Calculate  Performs the various calculations on the input parameters for the correlations
selected.
Cancel  Returns you to the previous screen. Any changes or modifications will be
ignored by the system.

Continue  Continues to the next input screen. Any changes to the fields will be saved
and retained in memory for later calculations. A warning message will be
displayed when fields requiring input data are left blank.

Help  Provides on screen help for PVT. For general information, press the 'ALT'
and 'H' keys together in the Main menu, or the Index button under any help
screen. Specific help screens are also available for each window.

Main  Returns you to the Main Application Menu. Any changes or modifications will
be saved and retained in memory by the program.

OK  Returns you to the previous menu. Any changes or modifications will be
retained in memory by the program.

Plot  Plots any calculated results and displays them on screen. Hard copies of the
screen display can be printed by selecting the Print menu option on the Plot
screen.

Reset  Resets the Match parameters in order to reinstate the original text book
correlations.

Save  Saves a current PVT file. If this is a new data file, you will be prompted for a
file name.

Extract  Takes a copy of the input data and calculation/analysis results and stores the
values in a user-selected file

Export  Among the export options , the program creates a file with PVT compositional
data which can be imported into Petroleum Exports PROSPER  program or
other package.

Petroleum Experts  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 65/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 Models and Model


Options
This chapter describes briefly the background equations and inputs to the two models
available within the PVT package VIZ.

 the Black Oil Model


 the Equation Of State Model

In addition the following topics are also covered:

 Acentric factors
 Binary Interaction Parameters
 Volume Shift
 Hydrate Modelling
 Wax Modelling
 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity Modelling
 Water Eos Modelling

4.1 The Black Oil Model


Traditional Black Oil Modelling techniques have been applied within PVT to

•• Oil
Dry and Wet Gas
• Retrograde Condensate

Matching against Laboratory Data is also available.

Black Oil Modelling is a technique which works back from values of density and GOR
measured at known surface conditions to predict the properties at other points and the
results of process changes. The technique is fast and accurate when applicable.

4.2 The Equation of State Model


Equations of State were developed to give a mathematical relationship between pressure,
volume and temperature. They were originally put forward as a method of interpreting the
non-ideal nature of many pure substances. With time, this role has been extended
successfully to predicting the properties of simple and complex mixtures.

The equations used in PVT are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in common with
it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a repulsive element:

P total = P repulsive - P attractive

The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as

 RT  a
 P  =   −
v−b v  

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 66/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 39 PVTP User Guide

where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and


a the intermolecular attraction.

The two cubic Equations of State which are available within


the PVT package are

1) the Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS: 


 RT  a T 
 P  = −
v−b v v +b +b v −b  
and,

2) the Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS: 

 RT  a T 
 P  = −
v−b v v+b  

In addition there is a feature within the program which allows the user to customise the
general equation to suit a specific need

 All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility factor Z 
e.g. the Peng Robinsen equation becomes

 Z  − −  B  Z  +  A −  B  −  B  Z  −  AB −  B − B =  


and for SRK 

 Z  +  Z  +  A −  B
  −  B  Z  − AB =  

where

a T   P 
 A =
 RT   

bP 
 B =
 RT   

and

 Pv
 Z  =
 RT   

In addition there is a feature within the program which allows the user to customise the
general equation to suit specific needs (see Section 4.3.3)

4.2.1 The Acentric Factor


The acentric factor was put forward as a means of representing the non-sphericity and
polarity of many compounds. The original Equation of State PV=nRT  was based on a
model of hard spheres which behaved in a classical and predictable fashion. The vast
majority of compounds are, unfortunately, far from ideal and far from spherical. The

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 67/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 3 - 39

acentric factor provides a number which can be used in the equation of state to match
predicted PVT behavior with reality.

To quote the authors in Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria by J


Prausnitz and R. D. Lichtenthaler.

"Acentric
Based onFactors areof
deviation arbitrary and chosen
some fluids for convenience"
from that predicted by what the corresponding states
theory suggests for simple fluids, Pitzer proposed an experimental method for determining
the acentric factor.
It had been obseved for simple fluids that for simple fluids that the following relationship
held i.e.
 As the Temperature (T) approached 7/10 of the critical temperature (Tc) the measured
saturation pressure(Ps) approached 1/10 of the critical pressure(Pc).

 P  s T 
= =
 P c T c
  when  

Pitzer's proposal was to use the logarithmic deviation from this relationship as a measure
of acentric factor ω  

 P  s
ω  ≡ −   T  T c= −
 P c
 
The acentric factor enters the equation of state as a component which describes the
change in the intermolecular attraction component with temperature a(T) .
The Peng Robinson Equation is
 RT  a T 
 P  = −
v−b v v+b +b v −b
with  

a T   = a T c α 
  T  R
 
where the a(T) function at the critical point is given by the empirical relationship

 R T C 
a T   c =
 P C 
 
and α  T  R   is a function of the reduced temperature T/Tc and the acentric factor as
follows

α  =   + β  − T  R  
 β   is an empirical quadratic or cubic of the acentric factor  

 At values of   ω  less than 0.49 the equation is quadratic: 


 β  =  + ω − ω   

The estimation changes to a cubic at other values of   ω  :


 β  = +   ω  − ω  + ω   

In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 68/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 39 PVTP User Guide

 RT C 
b =
 P C 
 
Soave Redlich Kwong varies from PR in the constants within the empirical functions i.e.
 R T C 
a T   c =
 P C 
 β  =  + ω −   ω   
and
 RT C 
b =
 P C 
 

Table 4.1 shows some typical acentric factors. Note that the value increases with the size
of the molecule and its polarity.

Table 4.1 Common Acentric Factors

Compound Acentric Factor


Nitrogen N2 0.039 
Carbon Dioxide CO2 0.239
Methane C1 0.011
Ethane C2 0.099
Butane nC4 0.199
Hexane C6 0.299
Octane C8 0.398
Decane C10 0.489

 Acentric factors are available from the database supplied with the PVT package. The
values in table 4.1 are taken from the Petroleum Experts database.

The acentric factors for all components can be viewed and adjusted within the Base
Composition Information Page of the PVT package.
This display is selected by clicking on the View button within the Composition Input Page.

The latter display can be called by selecting Edit Composition option from the Data menu
or clicking on the icon.

It is particularly important to select the right acentric factor for pseudo components. This
value can be calculated automatically or input manually within the Composition Input
display. This display is selected by clicking on the Properties button within the Composition
Input Page.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 69/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 5 - 39

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 70/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 39 PVTP User Guide

4.2.2 The Binary Interaction Coefficient


The cubic equations of state were originally developed for pure substances. With time their
use was extended to mixtures. This extension required some method of introducing a
measure of the polar and other interactions between pairs of dissimilar molecules. The
binary interaction coefficient was put forward.
This variable enters the calculation as a component in the intermolecular attraction a.

For mixtures :
 N   N 
a= ∑∑ x  x  a
i=  j =
i  j ij
 

 xi  x j
where   
and   are mole fractions of components i and j, respectively and :
 
a = a i   a  j  − k ij
 

k ij
 is the binary interaction coefficient.
a aj
The attraction functions  i and    represent the a(T) functions for each individual
component. (see acentric factor help)
 
Binary Interaction Coefficients represent a flexible way of moulding the ideal Equation of
State to match the non-ideal reality of many mixtures.
The PVT package offers the user a variety of correlations for Binary Interaction Coefficients
as well as the opportunity to enter values manually.
This flexibility, however, brings with it the problem of where to start when characterising a
mixture. Hint on Binary Interaction Coefficients puts forward a possible approach.

The manipulations of k ij  are carried out within the BI Coefficient Dialogue:
This display is selected by clicking on the B I Coeffs... button within the Composition Input
Page.
The latter display can be called by selecting the Edit Composition option from the Data
menu or clicking on the icon.

The Select option within the Binary Interaction Coefficients Display will bring up a dialog
k ij
box which allows the user to select between the correlations available for   .
 
Choice of BI Coefficient 
 Authors disagree on the values of binary interaction coefficients for hydrocarbon mixtures.
Some suggest that kij  should be set at zero for hydrocarbon ↔hydrocarbon interactions,
and given a value for hydrocarbon ↔non-hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon↔non-
hydrocarbon pairs .
 At Petroleum Experts we suggest that this approach is suitable for systems solved using
the Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK) Equation Of State.

Wih the Peng-Robinson(PR) Equation Of State the following general approach was found
succesful in most cases

For Volatile Oils or Condensates , try


◊  A. N. Other Correlation for Boiling Point

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 71/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 7 - 39

◊ Bergman(PNA) and Cavett/Edmister for Acentric Factor


◊ No Binary Interaction Coefficients or a small value eg 0.05 between the C1
and heaviest component.

For Heavy Oils , try


◊ Petroleum Experts Correlation for Boiling Point

◊◊ TWU/Edmister for Acentric Factor


Binary Interaction Coefficients for all components

The PVT package offers the user a variety of correlations for binary interaction coefficients
as well as the opportunity to enter values manually.
The manipulations of kij are carried out within the display illustrated below:

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 72/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 39 PVTP User Guide

This display is selected by clicking on the B I Coeffs... button within the Composition Input
Page.
The latter display can be called by selecting the Edit Composition option from the Data
menu or clicking on the icon.

The Select option within the Binary Interaction Coefficients Display will bring up a dialog
box which allows the user to select between the correlations available for k ij.

4.2.3 Volume Shift


Volume Shift arises from an inherent weakness in the 2 parameter(a and b) Equations of
State in estimating liquid densities.
The Peng Robinson variant is

P=RT/(V-b)-a(T)/[V(V+b) +b(V-b)]

In the 3 parameter version V is replaced by a corrected version Vs where

Vs = V +cV

c is the third parameter and is the sum of the individual xi.ci


Since this correction is done after the flash equilibrium calculations, the component K
values,saturation pressure and phase envelope are not affected.
What is changed is the compressibility Z and anything derived from it i.e.
Density,GOR,FVF,Relative Volume etc.
The use of Volume Shift seems to be very attractive,since it corrects a known problem.

However , there are very significant problems in using this method eg.:
1) The Equation of State is non predictive . Matching must be used to model real fluid
behaviour.

Volume Shift can be used to make up for bad data or inadequacies in the matching
methods. This can be very dangerous particularly as there is no real control or limit to the
value of c . In our experience nearly all fluids can be matched without volume shift using
the methods outlined in EOS : Step by Step Guide . For this reason this method is not
recommended until all other approaches have been exhausted.

2) The Volume Shift approach is a fairly crude correction factor which solves the difficulty of

matching density.It
of the original does It
equation. ,however,
is not a introduce other
temperature problemsfunction.
dependent by breaking up theacontinuity
Matching c  at one
elevated temperature may cause difficulties with matching and the material balance at
another. lower temperature
Volume Shift is available when any equation of state model is selected within the
OPTIONS display.
Thereafter all relevant calculation displays and the Preferences/Calculation Tolerances
contain a volume shift control panel.
The control panel consists of a check box to switch on and off the correction and a button
to set up the Volume Shift parameters (see Volume Shift Setup below)
There are two ways of setting up volume shift within the program.
The first is based on calculating ci (called Vol Shift C within the program) as a function of
Zrackett Pc and Tc..
The second is based on a method from Jhaveri and Joungren (SPE 13118,1988)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 73/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 74/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 39 PVTP User Guide

The main body of this dialog is a grid which displays the parameters used to calculate
volume shift Vol Shift C and Vol Shift S  and those used to calculate c and s values. All
data within the grid can be edited manually and stored.

The grid has a tab control to swap between streams.


 As described in the Volume Shift Help. 2 methods of obtaining a shift are available within
the package. Radio buttons on the top right of the display allow the user to swap between
the methods.

Each method has a clear and calculate button to create new values.
The Jhaveri and Joungren has an additional two edit boxes for the D and e variables which
are used to calculate the component S values.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 75/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 11 - 39

This button allows the user to get a feel for the degree to which the volume shift is varying
the fluid properties. When presssed the program will flash the fluid to standard condition
with and without the shift on. The results are presented as shown below

The Volume Shift checkbox allows the user to switch on and off the global volume shift
correction flag

Exit and Save closes down the dialog with all changes retained
Cancel closes down the dialog with all changes ignored

The Volume Shift checkbox allows the user to switch on and off the global volume shift
correction flag

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 76/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 77/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 78/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 - 39 PVTP User Guide

ASSUMPTION 3  The volume change at the melting point is assumed to be negligible and
these terms are ignored,giving:

∆  H  = ∆h f   + ∫ ∆C  p d T 


a − > d 
T t 
 
The entropy cycle can be written as:

∆ S  = ∆ S  + ∆ S  + ∆ S 
a − > d  a − >b b −>c c − > d   

which in a similar way to enthalpy becomes



∆C  p    P t 
d ∆ v
∆ S  = ∆S  f   +  ∫ d T  − ∫ d  P 
a − > d  T  dT 
T t   P 
 

ASSUMPTION 4 again the volume change is assumed to be negligible giving


∆ S  = ∆S  f   + ∫ ∆C  p d T 


a − > d  T 
T t 
 
The entropy change at fusion is defined as:
∆ H  f  
∆S  f   =
T t 
 
Substituting the results of the cycle in eqn 2 and rearranging gives the eqation which acts
as the fundemental for many wax models:

 f   L ∆ H  f   T t  ∆c p T t  ∆c p T t 


 f  S  =  RT t  T  − −  R T  − +  R T 
 

ASSUMPTION 5  for most materials the melting point line is nearly parallel with the
Pressure axis allowing the triple point temperature to be replaced with the melting point.

 f   L ∆ H  f   T melt  ∆c p T melt  ∆c p T melt 



= − − − +
 f    RT t  T   R T   R T 
.................eqn 3

ASSUMPTION 6 Implicit in the use of this equation is that the thermodynamics of a pure
substance in an ideal solution can be extended to a mixture where the solvent is non-ideal
and the solid is neither ideal nor a pure single species
Some points to note about this equation is that it is dominated by the Melting Point value.In
essence this value determines when the solid may start to form. The other important term
is the Heat of Melting which plays a role both in the formation temperature and the amount
of solid formed. In its simplified form,this equation as used by Won overestimates both the
Wax Appearance Temperature and the amount of wax formed.The various models
question the assumptions built into this model extending the equation in various ways to
remove these errors.
How this equation is used and adapted within the various models is given in Model Details
section

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 79/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 15 - 39

4.3.1 Wax Model Details

 WON ORIGINAL

This model
Won isthe
derived outlined in reference
equation 1 (SectionSection
3 (Wax Modelling 4.3.2). 4.3) and expressed it as follows:

 si γ i
 L
∆ H  f   T  ∆c p T melt  T melt 
 P 
 ∆ v
 K  = = −   + − + +∫
SL
i dP 
 xi γ iS   RT t  T melt   R T  T   RT 
.......4
 x  s
where i and i are the mole fractions of i in the liquid and solid respectively.
Won simplified this equation by assuming the second and third terms were equal to zero
γ  Li
γ  S 
and the ratio of activity coefficients i  was equal to 1.
This leaves a fairly simply equation which unfortunately exaggerates both the Wax
 Appearance Temperature and the amount of wax formed.
 si ∆ H  f   T 
 K iSL = =   −
 xi  RT t  T melt 
 

Within the model the required values for Melting Points and Heats of Melting are taken fron
the following correlations

T melt  = +   M i −
 M i
and  
∆ H    =  f  
 M iT i m
 
 M i
where is the molecular Weight of component i
 
 WON WITH SOL PARAMS

This model is outlined in reference 4(Section 4.3.2) .


In an effort to overcome the weaknesses in his original model above Won suggested that
γ  Li

i
the assumption that γ   was equal to 1 was in valid as it lead to and overestimation of
the solubilities of C5 to C10 in the solid solution.
Instead the author proposed an estimation of the activity coefficients based on modified
regular solution theory.
This gives a method of estimating the activity ratio based on solubility parameters.

γ  Li vi  − −
= δ − δ i  L − δ  − δ i S 
γ iS   RT 
 
vi
where is the molar volume given by :
 M 
vi  = i
d  L  

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 80/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

16 - 39 PVTP User Guide

 M i d  L
 is the molecular Weight of component i and is the liquid density of the component
at 25 degrees C estimated by:
d  L = +   e−  M i −  M i
 
The paper gives estimates of the solid and liquid solubility parameters δ  up to C40

δ   is the average solubility parameter for the respective phase


Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in his original model for
estimationg melting points and heats of melting.

 CHUNG ORIGINAL

This model is outlined in reference 5 (Section 4.3.2) .


This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
assumption that the all the species in the solid are very similar and that the activity
coefficient of the solid can therefore be set to 1.
Equation 4 in Won Original above is modified by the introduction of solubility parameters to
be:

 si ∆ H  f     T  vi − vi vi
 K iSL = = −   + δ − δ i  L + + −
 xi  RT  T melt   RT  V m V m
 

with ∑
V m =     xi vi
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in won original for estimationg
melting points and heats of melting
In addition the following correlations are suggested for molar volume and liquid solubility
parameter.

vi =  M i +  e−  M i −
 M i  
and
δ i L = +    β  −  β  −  β 
 
 β  =
i and  M   M i
where is the molecular Weight of component i
 
 CHUNG MODIFIED

This model is outlined in reference 5 (Section 4.3.2) .


This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
correlations listed below:

∆ H  f    = T i m  M i


 
v i  =   M  i
 
and
δ i L = +    β  −  β  −  β 
 

 PEDERSEN WAX

This model is
The model is derived
outlinedfrom
in reference 3 (Section
the simplified 4.3.2)
version .
of equation 3 (Wax Modelling Section 4.3)
used by Won i.e.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 81/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 17 - 39

 f   L − ∆ H  f   T melt 



= −
 f    RT t  T 
 
Substituting fugacity coefficients for fugacities,this equation becomes:

− ∆ H 
 f  i =  x  iφ i p    f  
+ T T 
 RT t  melt   
 f  i
where is the fugacity of component i in the solid phase
 L
φ  i is the liquid fugacity coefficient of component i
 xi
 is the solid phase mole fraction of component i
and
 p  is the pressure

The basis for the model is the presumption that not all the high molecular weight material
can form waxes.
The fraction which is allowed to do so within the model comes from an empirical
relationship :
   p−  pi p
 z  =  z 
i
S  total 
i −  A + B − Mi  p

 p i  
S    total 
 z  i  z  i
where is the fraction of allowed to become wax,
 M i
 is the C7+ molecular weight
 ρ i
 is the SG of component i
 ρ i p
and is the SG of an equivalent paraffin given by:
 
 ρ i p = +  M i
 

 A B and C are constants with the following values

 A = 0.8824 , B= 0.0005354 and C=0.1144

The component melting points and heats of melting are calculated using correlations
proposed by Won(ref 1)

T i m = +   M i −
 M i
 
and
∆ H im  =    M iT i m
 

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 82/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

18 - 39 PVTP User Guide

4.3.2 Wax Model References


1) Continuous Thermodynamics for Solid-Liquid Equilibria: Wax Formation from Heavy
Hydrocarbon Mixtures by K.W. Won March 26 1985. ,Paper 27A presented at AIChE
Spring National Meeting. Houston,TX.

2) J.M. Prausnitz , R.N. Lichtenthaler,E. Gomesde Azevedo :- Molecular Thermodynamics


of Fluid-Phase Equilibria 2nd Ed. ,Prentice-Hall ,New Jersey (ISBN: 0-13-599564-7)

3) Prediction of Cloud Point Temperatures and Amount of Wax Formation by K.S.


Pedersen SPE Production & Facilities Feb. 1995 ,46-49

4) Thermodynamics for Solid Solution-Liquid-Vapor Equilibria: Wax Phase Formation from


Heavy Hydrocarbon Mixtures. by K.W. Won , Fluid Phase Equilibria,30 (1986) 265-279

5) Thermodynamic Modelling for Organic Solid Precipitation by T H Chung,SPE 24851

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 83/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 19 - 39

4.4 Hydrates

4.4.1 Background to Hydrates

This manual is not intended to be a comprehensive guide to the subject of hydrates.

 A detailed explanation of hydrates is available in references 1-4 of the Hydrate Reference


List.

Gas Hydrates are solid meta-stable compounds which form at higher temperatures than
that expected for pure water ice.

Gas hydrates can be referred to as componds because they have a fixed composition.

However, a hydrate is a particular type of compund which derives its formation not from
covalent bonds but from weak van der Waals attraction forces.
Within a hydrate, water molecules form a cage with spaces(cavities). If a gas molecule is of
the right size it can occupy a cavity and weakly bond to the surrounding water molecules.
This bonding makes the overall energy of the hydrate lower than that for the molecules in
non-hydrate form and acts as the thermodynamic driving force for hydrate formation.

The compounds formed by this type of loose entrapment are termed Clathrates.
Water has been identified as forming three types of hydrates VIZ. I ,II and H (ref.1,2)

For the purposes of this program we will cinsider only the more common I and II forms.

The differences between the two structures derive from the number of molecules which
make up a single unit.
Both types of hydrate contain a variety of small and large cavities.

The number and size distribution of the cavities within a hydrate determines the types and
amount of gas molecules which can be held.
Not all cavities need to be filled to form a stable hydrate.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 84/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

20 - 39 PVTP User Guide

Typical of the data supplied for the two hydrate types:

Property  Hydrate I  Hydrate II 


Number of water molecules per unit cell 46 136
No. of small cavities 2 16
No of large cavities 6 8
Small diameter Angstrom 7.95 7.82
Small diameter Angstrom 8.6 9.46
Potential guest molecules-small cavity C1 C1
CO2 C2
N2 CO2
H2S N2
H2S
Potential guest molecules-large cavity C1 C1
CO2 C2
N2 C3
H2S C4
iC4
CO2
N2
H2S

With a small number of potential guests and two possible structures, the calculation of
hydrate formation can be dealt with by the application of statistical mechanics (van der
Waals and Platteeuw ref. 5)
Estimating hydrate formation is explained in more detail in Hydrate Modelling.

Inhibitors 
Since hydrate formation is can be an expensive process problem ,much work has been
carried out to engineer its reduction or prevention.
The most common methods involve any or all of the following:

a) Keeping the temperature higher than the hydrate formation temperature.

b) Adding bulk inhibitors such as methanol or sodium chloride which will shift the hydration
curve downwards to lower temperatures and

c) Adding "kinetic" inhibitors which act to slow down the formation of hydrate crystals
The modelling of inhibitors is dealt with in Hydrate Inhibition.

The user is encouraged to read references 1 or 2 (Section 4.4.2) to get a more in-depth
view of this subject.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 85/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 86/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

22 - 39 PVTP User Guide

The lower the potential , the higher is the probability of finding a guest gas molecule at this
position. Of the alternative methods for calculating potential the most commonly used is
the Kihara (see ref 1 and 6 for more details).
C  ji
In the Sloan option (ref 1) within the program the adsorption constant is derived as
follows:
 
π   
 R ω (r )
C  ji =   kT ∫   −
kT 
r  dr 
 
where R is the cavity radius and r is the distance from the cavity centre.

The experimentally fitted Kihara cell potential


ω  r   is calculated from :

 σ  a σ  a 
ω  r  =  z ε  δ  +  δ  − δ  + δ  
 R r   R  R r   R  ........eqn 1
and
 r  a  − N  r  a − N  
δ  N  =  − − − +  − 
 N    R  R  R  R  

where N = 4,5,10 or 11 as in eqn 1


z = the coordination number of the cavity
R = the free cavity radius
r = distance from the cavity centre
the parameters ε , a ,and
  σ    are experimentally derived parameters which are unique to
every guest molecule.

This model outlined in the Petroleum Engineer's Handbook (ref 4 Section 4.4.2) uses a
simplified fit for the adsorption constant VIZ.
 A  B
C  ji   =
T  T 
where A and B vary for  the gas molecule , the hydrate and the type of cavity.(see
Background to Hydrates)

C  ji
This model from reference 3 (4 Section 4.4.2) uses a function for of the type shown for
the model above , but with different values for A and B.
 

The total chemical potential equation takes the form:

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 87/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 23 - 39

µ  H  − µ  ∆µ w T   P  T  ∆hw  P  ∆vw


= −∫ dT  + ∫ dP + a
 RT   RT  T   RT   P   RT   
∆ w T   P 
where  is the chemical potential at the chosen reference state with temperature
T   P 

 
∆hand
w
pressure
is the specific enthalpy
  ∆v
difference and w   is the specific volume difference going

from to T
 
∆ w T   P  ∆  hw ,
The models used vary a little in the experimentally determined values for ,
and
∆v
w . Model details are available within the references quoted.

a is the activity of water within the system. The value of pure water is taken as 1. When an
inhibitor is used the value of a is adjusted to include the inhibition effect.
See Hydrate Inhibition for more details.

4.4.3 Hydrate Inhibition


There are 2 types of hydrate inhibitor i.e. kinetic and thermodynamic.
Kinetic inhibitors are designed to slow down the rate of hydrate formation by blocking or
stopping crystal growth.
These agents,fatty acids,amines and fatty alcohols do not stop hydrate formation, they ony
shift it to a different time and place.
Kinetic inhibition is outwith the scope of the PVT program at present.
Thermodynamic inhibitors disrupt the order within water produced by its hydrogen bonding.
This disruption reduces the activity of the water, making it less likely to form hydrates.
There are two main types of thermodynamic inhibitor VIZ. alcohols (methanol,glycol) and
electrolytes (NaCl,ZnCl etc.).
The chemical potential water molecules in the presence of alcohols decreases because
hydrogen bonds form between the water molecules and water.

With electrolytes the water molecules form a coat of many layer around the ions in solution.
This destroys the normal liquid crystal structure of water making it more difficult for the
ordered hydrate structure to form.
Both mechanisms result in a lowering of the water activity term a in the hydrate modelling
equation.

µ  H  − µ  ∆µ w T   P  T  ∆hw  P  ∆vw


= −∫ dT  + ∫ dP + a
 RT   RT  T   RT   P   RT   

 Activity correlations are found in references 1,2 and 7 (Section 4.4.2) for the inhibitors
supported

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 88/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

24 - 39 PVTP User Guide

4.4.4 Hydrate Model References

1) Clathrate Hydrates of Natural Gases by D.S.Sloan :-Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
(ISBN: 0827 99372)

2) Hydrates of Hydrocarbons by Yuri F. Makogon :- PennWell Publishing Company,


Tulsa,Oklahoma

3) Properties of Oils and Natural Gases by K.S.Pedersen,A.Fredenslund and


P.Thomassen :- Gulf Publishing Company.Houston

4) Petroleum Engineers Handbook :- Society of Petroleum Engineers ,Richardson,Texas.

5) Platteeuw. J.C. and van der Waals. J.H. : Thermodynamic Properties of Gas Hydrates
II. Phase Equilibrium in the System, Rec. Trav. Chem.(1959),78,126-133

6) J.M. Prausnitz Equilibria


of Fluid-Phase , R.N. Lichtenthaler,E. Gomesde,New
2nd Ed. ,Prentice-Hall Azevedo :- Molecular
Jersey Thermodynamics
(ISBN: 0-13-599564-7)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 89/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 25 - 39

4.5 Compositional Gradient

4.5.1 Background to Compositional Gradient


The compositional gradient function calculates the effect of gravity on the distribution of
components within the reservoir. Under the influence of gravity light components will tend
to move towards the top of the structure with the heaviest having a greater abundance
towards the bottom.

Fig 1

fi(T,P,ni) f1i(T1,P1,ni)
 

With no and
pressure gravity effect the fugacity of a component is a function of the temperature,
composition.

Fig 2

f1i(T1,P1,ni,dz)

}   dz
fi(T,P,ni)
 
With the gravity effect introduced the fugacity also becomes a function of the change in
height dz.
The change in the component fugacities over the height change is given by the following
equation (full derivation in ref 1.):

 f   i
= −  Mwi  RT   gdz 
 fi   ..................... Eqn 1

 f  i   f   i
The fugacity of a component at reference changes to . The size of the change

depends on the temperature T, dz, and importantly the component molecular weight  Mwi .
When the component molecular weights are very different e.g. methane (18) and
asphaltene (2000-20000), the gradient is at its most extreme with the composition and
consequently the saturation pressure varying relatively quickly with depth.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 90/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 91/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 27 - 39

Fig. 4

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 92/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

28 - 39 PVTP User Guide

Fig. 5

From this diagram it can be seen that the fluids are very different. They do however share
a common point that is equal to the temperature and pressure at the GOC.

4.5.2 Compositional Gradient References

1) Thermodynamics of Hydrocarbon Reservoirs by A. Firoozabadi :-McGraw-Hill


(ISBN: 0-07-022071-9)

2) Prediction of compositional grading in a reservoir fluid column - Montel F. and


Gouel P.L. SPE 14410

3) Compositional variations within a hydrocarbon column due to gravity - Schulte A.


55th Techn. Conf. Soc. of Petr. Eng. AIMF,Texas,Sept. 21-24,1980 SPE 9235

4) Role of Asphaltenes in Compositional Grading of a reservoir's Fluid Column -


Hirschberg A. SPE 13171

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 93/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 29 - 39

4.6 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity Models


Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program.
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the
combo box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

The models available are listed below. To obtain details of any model click on the name.

 Lohrenz, Bray Clark (section 4.6.1) - based on Jossi et al with reduced density
written in terms of Vcs
 Pedersen et al (section 4.6.2) - corresponding states model with methane as the
reference substance
 Zhou et al (section 4.6.3) - corresponding states model with nC14 as the reference
substance
 Little and Kennedy (section 4.6.4) - correlation based on oil density molecular
weight,specific gravity and weight fraction of C7+

With unmatched fluids the Pedersen model tends to give the best results. Lohrenz Bray
Clark is the most commonly used model but it gives high errors for liquids if the viscosity is
not matched. When matched the LBC model gives the best match. In most cases LBC is
the only practical options as export formats to other packages are written in terms of LBC
inputs..

The Little and Kennedy correlation is very good at predicting the viscosity of oils above
bubble point. Below saturation pressure results are mixed with some fluid values being
totally unsatisfactory.
The thermal conductivity model that is included within PVTp is very similar in derivation to
the viscosity model from Pedersen et al (section 4.6.5)
The references for all the models are given in section 4.6.6

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 94/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

30 - 39 PVTP User Guide

4.6.1 Lohrenz,Bray,ClarkViscosity Model


Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program.
This model(ref 5) is probably the most commonly used for hydrocarbon mixtures. Is is an
adaptation of a model proposed by Jossi et al (ref 11).

 At the core of this model is a fourth-degree polynomial in reduced density.

η  − η  ξ   + −
= a +  a  ρ r  + a  ρ  r  +  a  ρ r  + a ρ r 
 
where a1 = 0.10230
a2 = 0.023364
a3 = 0.05833
a4 = -0.040758
a5 = 0.0093324

 x  is the low-pressure gas mixture viscosity and is determined by the method proposed by

Herning and Zippener (ref 12)


 N   N 
η  = ∑
i=
   z iη i  MW i   ∑ z  MW 
i=
i i

 
the individual component viscosities are given by the following expressions

  −
η i =  x  T ri
ξ i T ri  <
 

η i =    x   − T ri −
ξ i T ri  >
ξ i
 is the component viscosity-reducing parameter.
For a mixture this variable is determined as follows:

− −
  N     N      N  
ξ  = ∑ z i T ci  ∑
  i=  z i MW 
  i ∑  z i P ci 
 i=    i= 
 
 ρ r  in equation 1 is the mixture density divided by the critical density of the mixture.

 ρ 
 ρ r   =
 ρ c
 
The variation introduced by Lohrenz et al was in the calculation of the critical density.
This variable was rewritten in terms of the critical volumes of the mixture components.


   N   
 
 ρ c =   =  ∑    z iV ci +  z c +V cC  + 
V c  i = 
  i ≠C  +  

The origins of the LBC model lies in gases rather than liquids. Its dependence on the
density term causes inaccuracies with viscous fluids.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 95/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 31 - 39

NOTES on REGRESSION

Without matching the LBC model can get the viscosity of oils very wrong. The introduction
of Viscosity Automatching into the PVTp program was designed to help address this
weakness.

In regression
Vc values arethe
notprogram uses theelse
used anywhere component
within thecritical volumesthis
EoS models, to match lab can
matching data.Since
be donethe
in
isolation.

See Viscosity Matching(Section 7.10.3) for more details on the procedure used.

4.6.2 Pedersen et al Viscosity Model


In this model viscosity is calculated using a corresponding states model. This method is
very similar to the corresponding states thermal conductivity model .
The basic model is described in reference 1.

The corresponding states theory suggests the reduced conductivity   r    is a function of


reduced pressure and temperature

η r  =  f     P r  T r 

and the reduced viscosity is given by

  η 
η r  =   −
T c  P c  MW 
 
 f  
The basic premise of the corresponding states theory is that the function is the same for
all the similar substances within the group.
Pedersen et al (refs 1,3,4) have proposed the following relationship for the viscosity of
mixtures.

η mix  P  T  =   T c mix T co −


 P c mix  P co      MW mix  MW o α mix α  η o  P o T o

T c mixα mix  P c mixα mix


T o = T   P o =  P 
T coα o  P coα o
where   and  

The subscript o indicates the reference substance methane.


The critical temperature of the mixture is given by:

 
∑∑

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 96/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

32 - 39 PVTP User Guide

T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
T ciT cj
 P c mix =
T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
 
The molecular weight is calculated using the expression

  −
 MW mix =  x   w 
 MW  − MW n + MW n

In function 1) the important elements still to be found are


a) The viscosity of the reference substance VIZ methane
α  x
b) The correction factor   for the mixture and the reference substance

The model for the the viscosity of the reference substance is based on the work of Hanley
et al (reference 9).
This has been extended by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 1,3) to become:

η   ρ  T  = η o T  + η  T    ρ  +  F  ∆  η   ρ  T  +  F ∆ η  ρ  T 


 
Each element is a polynomial in temperature and methane density. See reference 1 and 4
for details.
The methane density comes in the form of a modified BWR EoS.Details of this polynomial
are given in reference 10.
Pedersen et al have suggested that the correction factors should take the following form:

 
α mix = +   x  − ρ ri MW mix
  and

α o =  +   ρ ri
NOTES on REGRESSION 
In general,without matching the Pedersen model gets closer to the range of petroleum
mixture viscosities. There are still inaccuracies , however, particularly with viscous oils.
In an effort to reduce this error a matching facility has been added to this model.
Unfortunately, the main variables within the model are the component Tcs and Pcs.
Since these values are set by PSAT matching etc. it is not practical to use them again for
viscosity matching.
 As an alternative, a shift and multiplier option has been added to match viscosity with this
model i.e..
Visc = Visc*Multiplier + Shift
See Viscosity Matching(Section 7.10.3) for more details on the procedure used.

4.6.3 Zhou et al Viscosity Model


This viscosity model is similar to the model proposed by Pedersen et al. it is also a
corresponding states model.
The function is less complex than that applied by Pedersen. The other significant
difference is that nC14 rather than methane is used as the reference substance.
The corresponding states theory suggests the reduced conductivity η 
  r    is a function of

reduced pressure and temperature



=  f     P r  T r 
and the reduced viscosity is given by

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 97/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 33 - 39

  η 
η r  =   −
T c  P c  MW 
The basic premise of the corresponding states theory is that the function  f   is the same for
all the similar substances within the group.
 
Zhou et al (ref 6) have proposed the following relationship for the viscosity of mixtures.
η mix  P  T  = T c mix T co  P c  mix  P 
  co  −
 MW mix  MW o −
η o  P o T o

T c mix  P c mix


T o  = T   P o  =  P 
T co  P co
where   and  

The subscript o indicates the reference substance nC14.

The viscosity of the reference substances given by the expression:

η o T   P  =   aP  + bP + dP  + eP  +  fP  +  gP + h  
  T  − iP  +  jP + k   
where P is the pressure in bars and T is the temperature in degrees C.

The constants used in the formula have the following values:

a = -4.868729x10-6
b = 6.162691x10-3
c = -3.461585
d = 1.545022x10-9
e = -3.443880x10-6

fg==4.187426x10-3
-2.527380
h = 874.0397
i = -2.985316x10-4
 j = 0.3435125
k = -182.6151

NOTES on REGRESSION 
In general,the Zhou model does not get as good an initial value as that of Pedersen et al.
There are significant inaccuracies , particularly with viscous oils.
In an effort to reduce this error a matching facility has been added to this model.
Unfortunately as with Pedersen, the main variables within the model are the component
Tcs and Pcs.
Since these values are set by PSAT matching etc. it is not practical to use them again for
viscosity matching.
 As an alternative, a shift and multiplier option has been added to match viscosity with this
model i.e..
Visc = Visc*Multiplier + Shift
See Viscosity Matching(Section 7.10.3) for more details on the procedure used.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 98/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

34 - 39 PVTP User Guide

4.6.4 Little and Kennedy Viscosity Model


This viscosity model has been derived empirically from measurements of pure component
and petroleum mixture viscosities(ref 7).
The equation is a cubic in viscosity:

           M   
 B =  B +  B   +  B   +  B (γ   ) c + +  B (γ  ) c + +  B   c +
   
T    T      γ   
   ρ   
+  B  m  +  B  M  +  B  M  ρ  m +  B  M  ρ  m +  B  ρ  m +  B  ρ  m
  T     

where is the viscosity, T is the temperature in degrees Rankin and P is the pressure in
psia.

am bm
The values of and are given by the following functions:

am   = ( e  A)
bm   = ( e  B )
 A and B in turn are given by polynomial expansions:

      M       ρ   
 A =  A +  A   +  A  M  c + +  A   +  A  m 
  T      γ    c +   T   
   ρ   
+  A  m  +  A  M  +  A  M  +  A  M  ρ m +  A  M  ρ m +  A  ρ m
  T   
and
          M   
 B =  B +  B   +  B   +  B (γ   ) c + +  B (γ  ) c + +  B   c +
  T      T      γ   
   ρ   
+  B  m  +  B  M  +  B  M  ρ m +  B  M  ρ m +  B  ρ m +  B  ρ m
  T   
with
 M c +  the molecular weight of the C7+ fraction
γ c +   the specific gravity of the C7+ fraction
the average molecular weight of the mixture
 ρ m   the density of the mixture at reservoir conditions

The value of the A and B constants are given in the table below:

 A Value B Value
0 21.918581 -2.6941621
1 -16815.621 3757.4919
2 0.023315983 -0.31409829x10(12)
3 -0.019218951 -33.744827
4 29938.501 31.333913
5 -2802762.9 0.24400196 X10(-10)
6 -0.096858449 0.700237064 X10(12)
7 0.54324554X10(-5) -0.037022195
8 0.13129082 0.070811794

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 99/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 35 - 39

9 -0.10526154X10(-5) -0.83033554X10(-9)
10 -31.680427 21.710610
11 -31.083554

4.6.5 Thermal Conductivity Model


Thermal conductivity is calculated using a corresponding states model. This method is very
similar to the corresponding states viscosity models .
The basic model is described in reference 1.
The corresponding states theory suggests the reduced conductivity λ 
  r    is a function of

reduced pressure and temperature


λ r  =  f     P r  T r 
and the reduced conductivity is given by
  λ 
λ r  =  − −
T c  P c  MW 
 f  
The basic
all the premis
similar of the within
sustances corresponding states theory is that the function
the group. is the same for
Pedersen et al (refs 1,3,4) have proposed the following relationship for the thermal
conductivity of mixtures.


λ mix  P  T  = T c mix T co  P c mix   P co  MW mix  MW o −

 x α ix α  λ o  P o T o − λ  o  P o + λ  mix T 

T c mixα mix  P c mixα mix


T o = T   P o =  P 
where T coα o   and  P coα o  
The subscipt o indicates the reference substance methane.

The critial temperature of the mixture is given by:


T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
T ciT cj
T c mix =
T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
with the critical pressure being given by:

T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
T ciT cj
 P c mix =
T ci T cj
∑∑ z  z 
i j
i  j
 P ci 
+
 P cj
 
The molecular weight is calculated using an expression put forward by Mo and Gubbins
(ref. 8)

  T ci T cj − −
 MW   z  z   MW  +  MW  T    T  T c mix P c mix
=   ∑∑ +  P cj
mix i  j i  j ci cj
i j  P ci
In function 1) the important elements still to be found are

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 100/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

36 - 39 PVTP User Guide

a) The thermal conductivity of the reference substance VIZ methane


α 
b) The correction factor  x   for the mixture and the reference substance
Most workers suggest that the thermal conductivity can be separated into two contributions
i.e. the internal and the translational:
λ  =  λ 
  tr + λ 

The internal part is given by the following functions:


λ  =   η  Cp id  −  R  f    ρ r   MW 
 f    ρ r  = +   r  − 
 ρ   ρ r  − ρ r 
id 
where is the gas viscosity is the gas voscosity at temperature T and 1 atm. Cp is the
Ideal Gas Heat Capacity at temperature T. R is the gas constant.
 ρ r   is the reduced density.
The model for the the thermal conductivity of the reference substance is based on the work
of Hanley et al (reference 9).
This has been extended by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 1,4) to become:
λ   ρ  T  = λ o T  + λ  T   ρ  +  F 
  ∆λ   ρ   T  +  F  ∆λ   ρ  T  +∆ λ c ρ  T 
Each element is a polynomial in temperature and methane density. See reference 1 and 4
for details.
The methane density comes in the form of a modified BWR EoS.Details of this polynomial
are given in reference 10.
α 
Tham and Gubbins reported  x values for the smaller molecules found in hydrocarbon
mixtures(ref 11).
Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 4) extended this past C7 using the function:
α i =  +    ρ ri MW i
with the value for mixtures given by:
α mix = ∑∑
   z  z    α  α 
i  j i  j
i j

This expression was modified by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 4) to be:


α mix = +  ρ r    α  −
α 
where α    is equal to the mix  value in equation 2)

4.6.6 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity References

1) Properties of Oils and Natural Gases by K.S.Pedersen,A.Fredenslund and


P.Thomassen :- Gulf Publishing Company.Houston

2) Pedersen K.S. et al ,"Viscosity of Crude Oil", Chem. Eng.Sci.,39,1984,pp 1011-


1016

3) Pedersen, K.S. and Fredenslund,Aa.,"An Improved Corresponding States Model


for the Prediction of Oil and Gas Viscosities and Thermal Conductivities",Chem.
Eng.Sci.,42,1987,pp 182-186

4) Christensen, P.L. and Fredenslund,Aa.,"A Corresponding States Model for the


Thermal Conductivity of Gases and Liquids",Chem. Eng.Sci.,35,1980,pp 871-875

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 101/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 4 - Models and Model Options 37 - 39

5) Lohrenz,J.,Bray,B.G., and Clark, C. R.," Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids


from Their Compositions",J.Pet.Technol.,Oct.1964,pp 1171-1176

6) Ducoulombier,D.,Zhou H.,Boned,C.,Peyrelasse,J.,Saint-Guirons,H., and Xans P.,J.


Phys.Chem. 1986,90,pp 1692-1700

7) Little,Kennedy,Soc.Pet.Eng. J.,June 1968 ,pp 157

8) Mo,K.C. and Gubbins,K.E., "Conformal Solution Theory for Viscosity and Thermal
Conductivity of Mixtures",Mol.Phys.,31,1976,pp 825-847

9) Hanley H.J.M.,McCarty,R.D. and Haynes,N.M.,"Equation for the Viscosity and


Thermal Conductivity of Methane",Cryogenics,15,1975,pp 413-417

10) McCarty,R.D.,"A Modified Benedict-Webb-Rubin Equation of State for Methane


Using Recent Experimental Data",Cryogenics,14,1974,pp 276-280

11) Jossi,J.A.,Stiel,L.I.,and Thodos,G.,"The Viscosity of Pure Substances in the Dense


Gaseous and Liquid Phases",AIChE J.,8,1962,pp 59-63

12) Herning,F.and Zippener, L.,"Calculation of the Viscosity ofTecnical Gas Mixtures


from the Viscosity of Individual Gases"Gasu. Wasserfach,79,1936,pp 69-73

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 102/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 103/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 104/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

5 Main/Stream Options
This section describes the PVT main menu and the data required to be input before an
analysis can be performed. Data should be entered by working through the PVT menus
from left to right and top to bottom. The following menus are described in this section:
• Main menu
• Options menu
• Streams menu

5.1 PVT Main Menu


 All PVT functions are listed as menu options. Simply select the menu required and choose
an item from the list displayed. This will activate an option or display the relevant screen.
Every option you select has a result you can see. You will automatically be taken through
the necessary steps to enter data and perform calculations. The intention is to move from
left to right across the main applications menu.

To start PVT, select the appropriate icon and press ↵ or double-click the program icon. A
screen similar to the following will appear:

Figure 5.1: 
 
Main Menu

The menu options across the top of the screen are the PVT main menu options. Each is
described below.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 105/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.1.1 File
The File menu is a management menu with commands that enable you to open, save or
create new data files. You can use this menu to move between open files and set-up
printer options.

5.1.2 Options
The Options menu is the starting point of PVT and the key to the program. Use this menu
to define your application and principal features of the PVT model to be used. The options
you select are unique to the current file and apply until changed by the user, or another file
is recalled. These options also determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands
which are displayed. This menu is also used to define the input and output units of
measurement. A flexible system of units is provided allowing you to customise the internal
units system.

5.1.3 Data
Use the Data menu to define mixture compositions and properties including pseudo-
components. PVT correlations can be modified to match laboratory measured data using a
non-linear regression technique. In addition , grouping of components ,setting of reference
conditions, and customising the equation of state are also available.

5.1.4 Calculation
The Calculation menu provides you with the relevant calculation options. Calculations
include critical temperature and pressure ,phase envelopes, constant volume depletion,
depletion study, constant composition expansion ,differential expansion ,separator
compositions, and compositional gradient and swelling tests

5.1.5 Calc. Solids


The Calc. Solds menu provides you with access to calculations involving hydrates and
waxes.

5.1.6 Streams
Within a PVTp
PVT report. file
This the data
menu is packaged
allows upnew
you to setup as streams.
streams Each stream
, delete being
a stream equivalent to a
etc.

5.1.7 Reporting
The Report menu is used to generate the reports of the input data, analysis data and
results. Results can be viewed on the screen, sent to the Windows clipboard or saved in a
file.

5.1.8 Utilities
 A series of useful calculators are included within the Utilities menu. These include API
conversion, material balance and enthalpy balance.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 106/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 3 - 24

5.1.9 Preferences
This menu allows the user to change the look of the front screen and change some
calculation options.

5.1.10 Window
This menu offers the user the standard options available from an MDI (Multi Document
Interface)

The PVT package can load multiple PVT Project Files each of which occupies its own
window.
The windows can be selected ,cascaded,arranged and tiled via this menu.

5.2 Toolbar
Two toolbars are attached to the bottom of the main menu. Each icon represents one of
the most used menu options. As the mouse pointer passes over the icon a short
description of the option is displayed in the Statusline which is situated at the bottom of the
main PVT window. When an option is unavailable the icon is greyed-out.
To select an option , place the pointer over the icon button and press the left-hand mouse
button.
The main icons perform the following functions:

Open an existing PVT file

Save a PVT file

Select main PVT options

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 107/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 24 PVTP User Guide

Change the PVT units for this file  

Select the Components for this PVT file 

Change the composition of the mixture 

Calculate the Critical Pressure and Temperature 

Calculate the Phase Envelope 

Calculate a Range of Saturation Pressures 

Calculate the results of a Constant Composition Expansion 

Calculate the results of a Constant Volume Depletion 

Calculate the results of a Depletion Study (wellstream analysis) 

Calculate the results of a Differential Liberation 

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 108/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 5 - 24

Calculate the results of a Separation Process 

Calculate a Compositional Gradient

Calculate Swelling Test

Calculate Slim-tube

View mixture properties

Group mixture

Enter Lab/Match data

Regression

Exit from the PVT package

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 109/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.3 Summary Page


When a new file is created on an existing file is opened the front sheet shown in Figure 5.1
is replaced with a summary sheet showing the main points of information available for the
PVT project.

Figure 5.2: 
Summary
Sheet 

Multiple project files can be loaded. Switching between files is done via Window Menu or
by using the Next File button on the File Status bar. Each project file can be made up of
multiple streams, each containing a unique collection of data. The active stream is selected
via the list box wthin the summary toolbar.
The summary screen is made up of several elements which can be toggled on or off via the
Preferences menu:

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 110/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 7 - 24

If the Summary Screen is maximised a help tree appears on the right hand side of the
display. Clicking on any line will bring up the appropriate help item.

Figure 5.2a: 
Expanded
Summary
Sheet 

Within the display is information on whether the main calculations have been done for this
file. Double clicking any of the calculation names takes the user direcly to the calculation
input display.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 111/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.4 Option Selection


The Options menu is used to define the characteristics of the PVT project. The options
selected establish the input data required and the calculation options available. The
selections made apply to the current session. The data entry screens, input fields and
variables are limited to those relevant to your particular application. Input options may be
changed at any stage of the processing. New choices may require other information to be
supplied. Therefore the user is advised to ensure that all relevant input is still valid for the
new option selection.

To access the Options menu, point to the menu name and click the mouse or press ALT O.
The following data entry screen will appear:

Figure 5.3: 
System Options 

The entry screen is divided in three sections - System options , User information, and 
User Comments.

Under the System options section, define your PVT model characteristics such as Method,
fluid type, Separation Stages, Equation of State, etc. These selections determine
information you will be required to enter later. The User Information and User Comments 
section of the screen allows the user to enter data , comments and dates which help
identify the project and which are printed out in the report Input Data section .

5.4.1 Option Selection


To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of available
choices will be displayed.

5.4.2 PVT Method


There are three methods currently defined:
• Black Oil  

• Equation of State 

See Chapter 4 for more details .

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 112/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 9 - 24

5.4.3 Fluid Type


The fluid type options vary with the PVT Method

• Black Oil  
Options available:
◊ Oil
◊ Dry and Wet Gas
◊ Retrograde Condensate

• Equation of State
No options available 

5.4.4 Separator
The separator options vary with the PVT Method

• Black Oil  
Options available:
◊ Single Stage
◊ Two Stage

• Equation of State
Options available: 
◊ Multi-Stage

5.4.5 Equation of State


The Equation of Sate Options are described
in more detail in Chapter 4 The options
available are: The choice is between a series of equations provided via the main
calculation library

Peng-Robinson
Soave-Redlich-Kwong

5.4.6 User Information


This section is designed to help the user keep track of which project is associated with the
PVT file data. None of the entries are mandatory and none of the information entered in
the boxes is checked. Entries available are:

◊ Company
◊ Field
◊ Location
◊ Platform
◊  Analyst

The User Information is printed as part of any PVT report.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 113/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.4.7 User Comments


The user comments window allows the user to enter any comments which may be required
to track the history of the data or calculations within the PVT file.
To enter the comments area click the left hand mouse button when the cursor is over the
desired point.
 A new line is entered in the comments block by typing Ctrl+Enter at the desired point.
Pressing the Date Stamp Button places the current date and time at the end of the
comments block. The Comments are printed as part of any PVT report.

The Data Input procedures for the Black Oil is described in Chapter 6. The Equation of
Sate Data Input options are covered in Chapter 7.

5.5 Streams Menu


The PVT project file acts as a container for multiple sets of PVT data. These may be from
different attempts to solve the same the same sample match eg.using different
recombination GORs. They may originate from different samples at different depths or
regions within a field. They may be from totally unconnected systems . Each Stream can
be interpreted as equivalent to a PVTP version 1 file.
This structure is explained more in section 7.0.

Multi-Stream Regression allows the user to set up multiple streams and match all lab data
using a common set of component properties. The streams may represent samples from
different wells or surface and reservoir. See Chapter 7 for more details.
The Streams Menu allows the user to manipulate these important data structures and
includes:

 EDIT STREAM DETAILS -change stream name and comment.

 ADD STREAM - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files

 DELETE STREAM - removes unwanted streams.

 CREATE A STREAM TO A TARGET GOR - mixes the stock tank gas and oil to create
a stream with a predetermined GOR

 CREATE A STREAM TO A TARGET PSAT  - mixes the stock tank gas and oil to
create a stream with a predetermined saturation pressure

 BLEND STREAMS - mixes streams and their properties


 ALLOCATE :BLEND STREAMS TO A TARGET GOR – mixes two streams using the
blending algorithm until the mixture meets the entered GOR. The program then reports
the volume and weight percents required to create the mixture.

 ADD WATER TO A STREAM


 Create a stream with a fixed amount of water
 Create a stream saturated with water

See also DATA / EDIT MOLE PERCENTS 

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 114/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 11 - 24

5.5.1 Edit Stream Details


This option allows the user to change the stream name and the comment associated with
the stream.

Load the display from the Streams|Edit details option within the STREAM MENU
Select a stream using the combo box ,change the comment or name and press EXIT when
complete.

See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE. -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
 ADD STREAM - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
DELETE STREAM - removes unwanted streams.

5.5.2 Add Stream


This option allows the user to create a new stream from scratch,as a copy of an existing
stream or by importing.
The display is loaded from the Streams|Add stream menu option(see STREAM MENU)

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 115/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12 - 24 PVTP User Guide

to create an empty stream with no components selected click on the New Empty Stream
button . This will bring up the component selection dialog.
To COPY
Press Copy Existing Stream.This selection brings up this dialog

{bmc c:\projects\dev\pvtp\winhelp\BMP_WMF\STREAMS - ADD STREAM2.BMP}


To copy:

1. rename stream if required.


2. Highlight stream to copy.
3. Click on copy stream button.

To IMPORT
Press Import PVI File.This selection brings up this dialog

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 116/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 13 - 24

To Import:

1. Edit the new Stream name and comment..

2. Pressing IMPORT displays a PVT file selection dialog.Find the required file and press
OK.

3.The streams within this file will appear in the import listbox. Select the required stream
and press Read Stream.

Import ASCII file


This initiates the same import as the the File | Import option does.

Stream name and comment can also be adjusted after import using the EDIT DETAILS
menu option
Edit the new Stream name and comment. Select a stream from the list and press COPY.

See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE. -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
DELETE STREAM - removes unwanted streams.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 117/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.5.3 Delete Stream


Use this option to copy an existing stream or to import a stream from another PVT project
file .The display is loaded from the Streams|Delete .Stream  menu option(see STREAM
MENU)

Select the required stream and press Delete Stream. You will be prompted to confirm this
operation. If only one stream is available the delete option is not allowed.

See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE. -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
 ADD STREAM - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 118/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 15 - 24

5.5.4 Create a Stream to a target GOR

Use this option to create a stream with a particular GOR by combining the separator gas
and stock tank oil from a matched stream .
The display is loaded from the Streams|Create a Stream.... menu option
(see STREAM MENU) or from the icon above.

IMPORTANT NOTE 
When this stream is created it is done with surface gas and oil. The process therefore
mimics a recombination change. If the objective is to reflect a loss or gain of gas at
reservoir conditions then the approach is not entirely appropriate. The gas evolved near
saturation or that present in the gas cap may be quite different to that produced from the
separators. Using the swelling test or other methodologies may produce better results.

The procedure for creating the stream is as follows:


 Select the stream which is to be used as the source of the gas and oil. This will be
flashed to surface directly or through a separator train to provide the dead oil and
gas compositions.
 If the target GOR is to be with respect to a separator train setup the required stages
in the edit boxes provided and click on the Use Separator Train.... check box. If no
selections are made in the Separator Data area the fluid will be flashed straight to
stock tank conditions i.e.. standard temperature and pressure.


Enter
 As thetheprogram
target GOR and click
iterates on the Create
the iteration numberStream button.
and best solution to date will be
displayed

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 119/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

16 - 24 PVTP User Guide
 When a solution is found ( within the convergence test limit) the stream will be
created and labelled with the GOR value.
 On successful completion the dialog will shut down and return to the main display

The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy of the final value can be changed
using the edit boxes provided.

Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made.

Cancel will close down the dialog and ignore any entries which have been made.

5.5.5 Create a Stream to a target Saturation Pressure

Use this option to create a stream with a particular PSAT by combining the separator gas
and stock tank oil from a matched stream .
The display is loaded from the Streams|Create a Stream....  menu option(see STREAM
MENU) or from the icon above.

The procedure for creating the stream is as follows:


Select the stream which is to be used as the source of the gas and oil. This will be flashed
to surface directly or through a separator train to provide the dead oil and gas
compositions.

 Enter the Temperature at which the calculation is to be done


 Select the phase to be produced. With mose fluids a gass and oil can be produced
with the same PSAT .See Plot Profile below.
 Enter the target PSAT and click on the Create Stream button.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 120/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 17 - 24

  As the program iterates the iteration number and best solution to date will be
displayed
 If the saturation pressure target is above the maximum possible for the mixture a
warning will appear.See Plot Profile below
 When a solution is found ( within the convergence test limit) the stream will be
created and labelled with the PSAT value.

On successful completion the dialog will shut down and return to the main display
The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy of the final value can be changed
using the edit boxes provided.
Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made.
Cancel will close down the dialog and ignore any entries which have been made.

Unlike black oil models , EoS modelling is limited by the physical and mathematical realites

of mixingoftwo
pressure thefluidsi.e
mixture the
will separator liquid extreme
rise from either and gas.
to In a typical system
a maximum the saturation
somewhere in middle.
This feature highlights this limitation by plotting the range of possible saturation pressures
that can be derived from mixing the gas and oil. The typical plot below is taken from a
condensate sample.

The poinst with the additional sqares around are gas. The star on the plot marks the
original mixture's saturation pressure. It can be seen from thisplot that near critical fluids
,in general, will not produce a mixture saturation pressure very much above that of the
original mixture. See additional help on Plotting (Chapter 11).

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 121/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

18 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.5.6 Blend Streams


Use this option to copy an existing stream or to import a stream from another PVT project
file .The display is loaded from the Streams|Blend Streams  menu option(see STREAM
MENU)

This option allows the user to mix in a controlled fashion x% of stream A with y% of stream
B. All the component properties of each stream are combined using a mixing rule to form
the new stream’s values.
The stream produced can be assigned to a new stream,or used to overwrite an existing
stream, or sent to an archive. This is done via the radio buttons within the dialogue.
Select the two streams,select the percentages of each stream and click on Blend.
Press on OK to exit the dialogue and retain the changes.
Press on Cancel to exit the dialogue and ignore the changes.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 122/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 19 - 24

5.5.7 Allocate:Blend Streams to a Target GOR


Use this option to copy an existing stream or to import a stream from another PVT

This option allows the user to calculate the amount of two streams that would be required
to produce a mixture of the desired GOR. After calculation the stream can be created.
The display is loaded from the Streams|Allocate:Blend streams....  menu option(see
STREAM MENU) .

IMPORTANT NOTE 
The calculation will assume that all the components are perfectly mixed and come to
thermodynamic equilibrium. In the real case of two fluids meeting at a manifold the contact
time and phase splits present may not allow this to occur

The procedure for creating the stream is as follows:


Select the streams which are to be blended.
If the target GOR is to be with respect to a separator train setup the required stages in the
edit boxes provided and click on the Use Separator Train.... check box. If no selections
are made in the Separator Data area the fluid will be flashed straight to stock tank
conditions i.e.. standard temperature and pressure.
Enter the target GOR and click on the Calculate button.
 As the program iterates the iteration number and best solution to date will be displayed
When a solution is found ( within the convergence test limit) the mole percents and weight
percents of each stream requied will be displayed
Click on Create Stream if required.
On successful completion the dialog will shut down and return to the main display

The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy of the final value can be changed
using the edit boxes provided.
Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made.

The Plot Profile button will display graphically the full range of possible fluids.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 123/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

20 - 24 PVTP User Guide

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 124/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 21 - 24

5.5.8 Add Water : Create a Stream with a Fixed Amount


of Water

Use this option to create a stream with a particular mole percentage of water. This
operation is normally done to a matched stream .
The display is loaded from the Streams|Add Water to a Stream.... menu option
or from the icon above.
PVT lab experiments are normally done on samples from which all the water has been
removed. The PVT report must therefore be matched with no water present. This feature
allows a known water to be added and the effect of the water on the phase equilibria to be
calculated.

 A typical display would be:

Enter the mole percent of water required in the edit box provided and click on Create
Stream.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 125/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

22 - 24 PVTP User Guide

5.5.9 Add Water : Create a Stream Saturated with Water

Use this option to create a stream which contains the maximum percentage of water
before a water phase forms. This operation is normally done to a matched stream .
The display is loaded from the Streams|Add Water to a Stream.... menu option
or from the icon above. The calculation can also be reached from the Quick Calc dialog
The calculation is available in two forms:
Single Point - Create a Stream. This option calculates the value at single temperature
and pressure and allows the user to create a new stream containing the calculated amount
of water.
Range of Values. This calculates the water concentration over a range of temperature and
pressures.
 A typical Single Point display would be:

Enter the pressure, temperature and water salinity and click on Calculate.
When a value has been calculated the program allows the user to create a stream:
Enter a stream name and comment if required and click on To Stream.
Selecting Range of Values changes the display to:

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 126/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 5 - Main Options 23 - 24

Enter the range of pressures and temperatures required and click on Calculate.
This brings up the caculation results table.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 127/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

24 - 24 PVTP User Guide

Click on Calc again.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 128/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 Black Oil Input


This section describes the PVT the Data Input options for the Black Oil .

6.1 BLACK OIL PVT - General


The first stage in Black Oil PVT is to select the Model and the major variations i.e. Fluid
Type and Separator setup using the OPTIONS display.
Figure 6.0 shows a typical Options screen for Black Oil.

Figure 6.0: 
PVT Input Screen 

The methods available are:

 BLACK OIL
 EQUATION OF STATE

The BLACK OIL method is covered in this chapter, Equation of State is dealt with in
subsequent chapters.

The Black Oil Method originated as a series of empirical oil correlations . With time, the
methodology was extended to cover gases and condensates. The input and correlation
options change with fluid type. Use the Fluid Type listbox to match the fluid under study.
Depending on the Method , options of one, two, or multiple stage separator inputs may be
available.
When a Black Oil is used , the PVT summary screen and its icon toolbar adjust to provide
the correct information and menu options. Figure 6.0a shows a typical Summary
Screen.The example chosen is a Retrograde Condensate fluid using the Black Oil Method.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 129/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 130/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 6 Black Oil Input 3 - 10

6.2.1 BLACK OIL PVT - Oil


Select the Data | Input Data option from the main menu to display the following PVT Input
data screen:

Figure 6.1: 
PVT Input Screen 

Enter the required data in the fields provided. You can move from one box to another by
pressing the TAB key. Next, select the correlation methods you want to apply and click
OK.

6.2.2 Match Data


Enter PVT laboratory measured data to match to as shown on the example screen below.
The correlations can be adjusted using non-linear regression techniques (using the
Regression button) to best fit the measured data.

Figure 6.2: 
PVT Match Data Screen 

For each match data table, enter the temperature and bubble point, then enter pressure
versus gas oil ratio, oil FVF and oil viscosity. Where data is incomplete or not available,
leave the field blank.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 131/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 10 PVTP User Guide

6.2.3 Regression
This option is used to perform the non-linear regression which adjusts the correlations to
best fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-linear regression matching technique can
be used on up to five PVT match tables, each with a different temperature. The following
PVT properties can be used as match variables:
Pb Bubble point pressure.
GOR Gas oil ratio versus pressure.
FVF Oil formation volume factor versus pressure.
Oil viscosity Oil viscosity versus pressure.
It is not necessary to match on all properties. In cases where the PVT data is incomplete
or of poor quality, good results can often be obtained by matching on the best
characterised parameters only. However, because bubble point can be difficult to
accurately predict from correlations, it is recommended that where possible, it is used as a
match parameter. The minimum data required to perform a regression match is the bubble
point and GOR.

The form of the correlations for FVF are different above and below the bubble
 point. If the FVF at bubble point is not available, the regression may not achieve
good results. When matching the oil FVF always enter bubble point data.

Figure 6.3: 
PVT Regression Screen 

6.2.4 Match
From the Regression screen, individual correlations can be matched to selected measured
PVT data by:

Selecting the correlations


Selecting the fluid properties to match to
Clicking on Match

6.2.5 Match-all
 All correlations can be matched to all the fluid property data in one key stroke by selecting
the Match All command button.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 132/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 6 Black Oil Input 5 - 10

6.2.6 Parameters
Having performed the matching process the match parameters are displayed by clicking on
Parameters. The non-linear regression technique applies a multiplier - Parameter 1, and a
shift - Parameter 2 to the correlations. The standard deviation is also displayed which
represents the overall quality of fit. The lower the standard deviation, the better the fit.

6.2.7 Viewing the Match Parameters


The Parameters button displays the PVT correlations parameters screen. This shows the
match parameters and the standard deviation for each matched correlation. Use these
statistics to select the best correlation for your application. A plot should be made (refer
calculation and plot sections) and a visual check of the fit quality performed before making
your final selection. The match parameters can all be reset (i.e. returned to the un-
matched state) by selecting the reset option. The following is an example of a correlation
parameters screen:

Figure 6.4: 
PVT Match Parameters 

6.2.8 Calculations
In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PVT must first calculate the values
over a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Using the calculated data points,
plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated. The following is
an example of the Calculate | Calculations screen. If the correlations have been matched,
then the fluid properties will be calculated using the modified correlations.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 133/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 10 PVTP User Guide

Figure 6.5: 
PVT Calculation Set-up 

6.2.9 Calculating PVT Data


To generate tables and plots of PVT data:

Select Correlations (use the best matched ones)


Enter the temperature range and number of steps
Enter the pressure range and number of steps
Select whether the matched or unmatched correlations should be used
(click on Use Match Data for Calculations checkbox)
Click OK 
Click Calculate to compute PVT data for the entire range of pressures and
temperatures required by your application. The following calculation screen will be
displayed: 

Figure 6.6: 
PVT Calculation Results

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 134/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 6 Black Oil Input 7 - 10

6.2.10 Plotting the Calculated Data


The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables which are plotted are
defined under the Variables option on the plot. After performing a PVT calculation click on
Plot from the PVT calculation screen.

Select Pressure for the X-axis. 


Select Oil FVF for the Y-axis.

Figure 6.7: 
PVT Results Plot 

Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with your match data. If necessary, select
a different correlation and repeat the PVT calculations until you are satisfied with the
results.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 135/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 136/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 6 Black Oil Input 9 - 10

6.2.12 BLACK OIL PVT - Retrograde Condensate


The PVT Retrograde Condensate (Black oil) model has been developed in house by
Petroleum Experts. This model predicts liquid drop out. The reservoir gas gravity is
determined using the principle of mass balance for an equivalent density of the oil.

6.2.12.1 Input Data


When Retrograde Condensate (Black oil)  Method is selected the following input data
screen is displayed:

Figure 6.9: 
Black Oil Condensate PVT 

Enter the required data. Note if tank GOR and tank gas gravity are unknown, they can be
left at 0. For such cases, the total produced GOR should be entered under separator
GOR. Condensate gravity is at standard conditions.

If the separator pressure is above dewpoint, then there can be no liquids


  production. PVT handles conflicting input data by dropping the separator
pressure to atmospheric, and increasing the separator gas gravity as required to
account for the liquid production indicated by the Separator GOR . The mass
balance is respected at all times.

6.2.12.2 Match Data


Please refer to the Match data in section 6.1.1. The following fluid properties can be
matched to:
Dew point
Produced CGR (condensate to gas ratio)
Z (gas compressibility factor)
Gas viscosity
Gas FVF

The temperature and dew point must be entered for each set of match data.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 137/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 10 PVTP User Guide

CAUTION: When matching oil density, there should be no input pressure higher
  than Dew Point, since the oil density does not exist beyond that point.

 All other operations are carried out as for Oil PVT. Refer to Section 6.1.1.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 138/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 139/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 140/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 141/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 142/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 143/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 144/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 145/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 146/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 147/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 148/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 149/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 150/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 151/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 152/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 153/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 154/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual







PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 155/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 156/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual



PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 157/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 158/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual



PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 159/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 160/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 161/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 162/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 163/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 164/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 165/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 166/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual





PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 167/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 168/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 169/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 170/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 171/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 172/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 173/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 174/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 175/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 176/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 177/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 178/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 179/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 180/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 181/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 182/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 183/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 184/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 185/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 186/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 187/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 188/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual


PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 189/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 190/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 191/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP





http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 192/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 193/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 194/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 195/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria by J Prausnitz and R. D.


Lichtenthaler 
Many equations of state have been proposed and each year additional ones appear in the
literature,but most of them are either totally or at least partially empirical. All empirical
equations of state are based on more or less arbitrary assumptions which are generally not
valid. Since the constants which appear in an empirical equation of state for a pure gas
have at best only approximate physical significance, it is very difficult ( and frequently
impossible) to justify mixing rules for expressing the constants of mixture in terms of the
constants of the pure components which comprise the mixture.As a result,such
relationships introduce further arbitrary assumptions and it has been found that for
typical empirical equations of state, one set of mixing rules may work well for one or
several mixtures but poorly for others.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 196/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 197/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 198/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 199/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 200/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 201/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 202/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 2
 R T C 
a (T c ) 0.45724( )
 P C 

b 0.0778( RT C  )
 P C 

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 203/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 204/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 205/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 206/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 Calculation EoS
This section describes the calculation input required for the Equation Of State PVT model and
the various forms of results.

Calculations can be initiated in three ways


I. by selecting an option from the Calculation section of the main menu
II. by clicking on one of the calculation icons within the main toolbar
III. by clicking on the Calculate control button within the Edit Composition and Properties
displays (see Chapter 7)

Methods I. and II. give a choice of the following :

◊ Calculate Critical Pressure and Temperature (section 8.1)


◊ Calculate Phase Envelope for a range of Vapour Fractions(section 8.2)
◊ Calculate a range of Saturation Pressures(section 8.3)
◊ Calculate the results of a Constant Composition Expansion (section 8.4)
◊ Calculate the results of a Constant Volume Depletion (section 8.5)
◊ Calculate the results of a Depletion Study (section 8.6)
◊ Calculate the results of a Differential Expansion (section 8.7)
◊ Calculate the results of a Separator Process (section 8.8)
◊ Calculate the results of a Compositional Gradient (section 8.9)
◊ Calculate the results of a Swelling Test(section 8.10)
◊ Calculate the results of a Slim Tube Simulation(section 8.11)

Where applicable ,the last set of entries for each calculation are saved with the other data in
the PVT project file.
Method III. provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation menu as a means of
checking the consistency of the entered composition information. The small display provides
options to calculate (section 8.12):

◊ Phase Envelope
◊ Critical Point (Temperature and Pressure)
◊ Saturation Pressure (at the reference temperature)
◊ Flash to Standard conditions
◊ Flash Through Separator Stages

Maximum water in Hydrocarbon Phase
 All calculation results are retained for inclusion in the Reports available with the PVT package
(Chapter 9)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 207/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

 A critical point calculation can be initiated by selecting the Critical Point option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. Alternatively , the Calculate option on
the Edit Composition Screen etc. can be used (see section 8.12).
The result of the calculation is given in a dialog box . Figure 8.1 shows an example of this type
of output. Contained within the display are values for

• Critical Temperature Tc
• Critical Pressure Pc
• Critical Temperature Tc
• Critical Volume/Gas Constant Vc/R
• Critical Compressibility Zc
• Number of Iterations

In addition indication is given of the kind of system at reference conditions i.e. Dew Point (gas)
or Bubble Point (liquid)

Critical Point

It should be noted that the Critical Point may not always be resolvable for complex mixtures. If
this proves to be the case try adjusting the values of Binary Interaction Coefficient , Acentric
Factor of the heaviest components and the properties of any pseudo components which have
been defined. Remember that the equation of state is not predictive , if a match point is
available, always use this to guide your changes.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 208/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 3 -55

 A Phase Envelope calculation can be initiated by selecting the Phase Envelope option from
the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. Alternatively , the Calculate option
on the Edit Composition Screen etc. can be used (see section 8.10).
 A Phase Envelope calculation can be initiated by selecting the Phase Envelope option from
the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. Alternatively , the Calculate option
on the Edit Composition Screen etc. can be used. 

The display below shows an example of the phase envelope input parameters screen. As the
display loads it automatically calculates the phase envelope for vapour fraction 1.0. and the
currently active stream.(see PVT Project File Section 7.1).

The display is made up of several sections:

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.

There are 2 modes of entry

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 209/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

1) Auto- the entry boxes are loaded with values of 0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9, and 1.0
2) Manual entry - Eight entry boxes are provided for entering vapour fractions from 0.1 to
1.0

The button will remove all entries in Manual Entry mode.

Entry boxes are provided to change the following values used to limit the phase envelope
calculation.

- dictates the gap between pressure movements used to detect phase


envelope
- sets the bottom limit of the calculation
- sets the upper limit of the calculation
- dictates the size of movement of the Integration function
- dictates the maximum size of movement of the Integration function

This shows the shape of the phase envelope calculated . No adjustments are available for this
plot. However , the graph can be enlarged and then manipulated by using the Expand Plot
button.

This shows the critical points calculated during the phase envelope calculation and also
includes a status message area which indicates the progress of any calculations.
Note that the Critical Pressure Pc, Critical Temperature Tc ,Cricondenbar ,Cricondentherm
etc. may not always be resolved for complex systems.

Included in this area are a series of control button which have the following functions:

This option stores the values entered (in memory , not on disk) and closes down the display.

This option recalculates the phase envelope(s) using the latest inputs.

This option brings up a full-sized plot of the phase envelope.

This option calls the Test Points display. This allows the user to enter ten values for Saturation
Pressure versus Temperature. The values will be displayed on the Phase Envelope plot as
Match Point crosses

This option brings up the results dialog as shown below.


The user can view all the stream phase envelope data by scrolling down the tables and
moving between the tables by way of the stream tabs.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 210/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 5 -55

The results can be copied to the or to another package such as by


highlighting the values required and pressing
will insert the values into the target program.

This option brings up the on-line help.

The option of calculationg multiple curves is a very powerful aid in the analysis of petroleum
mixtures. Since streams can be filled with varying compositions changes in fluid
characteristics can be visualised. For example the program can illustrate how a fluid changes
as a result of a compositional gradient. Stream 1 and 2 can contain the compositions of gas

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 211/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

and oil calculated before and after the gas cap has been detected. The phase envelopes are
very different but they intersect at the gas cap temperature and pressure.
The compositions are transferred into the stream via the calculation analysis display. Since
the stream can also contain compositions from other PVT files (using

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 212/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 7 -55

 A Range Saturation Pressure calculation can be initiated by selecting the Saturation Pressure
option from the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
This dialogue is used for and Input .

The automatic version looks like this:

Range
Saturation
Pressure
 Automatic
Mode

The user selected version replaces the ranged input with a series of entry boxes which can be
used to enter any temperature.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 213/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Range
Saturation
Pressure
Manual
Entry 

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.See PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.

This display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected and
 Automatic modes.

In addition, data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the temperature and
pressure ranges to be covered and the number of points to be calculated for each variable.
The points will be spread evenly throughout the temperature and pressure ranges selected.
 All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Calculation Dialogue.

To bring up the calculation dialogue click on the control button.

will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen

Clear removes any entered values

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 214/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 9 -55

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details.

 A CCE calculation can be initiated by selecting the Constant Composition Expansion option
from the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Constant Composition Expansion is a flash process where all the products are retained i.e. the
total amount of each component at the initial conditions is the same at all the measured
values, only the phase splits (K values ) have been changed.

The CCE input displays contain a section for . This allows the user to define a
separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the and .
The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change
the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When multiple
samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have individual separator settings for
each stream. In this case, the radio button should be clicked on. The stream
separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table.All stages do not
need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.The
within the separator data area switches the correction on and off. The values within this
separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those within the Separator
calculation. The button will copy the stages from the Separator Calculation
(section 8.8) into the Separator Data area.The button removes all values from within the
Separator Data area.

The calculation input screen comes in two forms viz. Automatic (figure 8.7) and User Selected
Entry (figure 8.8).

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 215/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Figure 8.7:
Constant
Composition
Expansion
 Automatic Mode

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 216/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 11 -55

In the User Selected version the ranged input is replaced by a grid where any mixture of
pressures and temperatures can be entered

Figure 8.8:
Constant
Composition
Expansion
Manual Entry

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate. See PVT
Project File Structure for more information on streams.

This display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected and
 Automatic modes.
In addition, data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the temperature and
pressure ranges to be covered and the number of points to be calculated for each variable.
The points will be spread evenly throughout the temperature and pressure ranges selected.
 All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Calculation Dialogue.

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 217/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

To bring up the calculation dialogue click on the Calc control button.

Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen

Clear removes any entered values

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details.

For each calculation carried out, the analysis display presents information on compositions K
values,gas and oil gravities etc. In addition, intermediate compositions can be extracted for
further work as separate files or streams. See Analysis Display (Section 8.4.2)

The thermal conductivity calculation is relatively slow and complex. This checkbox gives the
user contrl over whether it is undertaken See Thermal Conductivity Model help for more
details.

The gas gross and net heating values are now calculated as columns within the calculation
table. The value given is derived from the composition of the accumulated gas after sending
the fluid through the indicated separator train.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 218/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 13 -55

The Calculation Display


 A typical CCE display is given in figure 8.9
This Dialogue allows the user to initiate calculations and view the results
.
Constant
Composition
Calculation
Screen

The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Calculate button is pressed on an Automatic or
User Selected Input Dialogue.
The display is in the form of a table with input values on the left and the required calculation
variables calculations listed in columns on the right.
If multiple streams have been selected (see Constant Composion Expansion), the user can
move betwen the streams by clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the display.(see PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading.
Scroll bars are provided to show more variables and results.
Colours have been used with grids to indicate phase:

- gas only
- mixture of oil and gas
- oil only

If the values have been already calculated the display will show the last set of values
calculated.
The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:

This option recalculates the table using the latest inputs provided

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 219/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This generates a full sized plot of the calculated results.

This options allows the user to select which columns are displayed in the results table. See
Calculation Layout Display .

This option produces a secondary screen giving the compositions calculated at each
measurement point. The analysis screen also provides access to the EXTRACT function
which allows the user to export a particular line of the calculation to a PVT file. Alternatively,
the intermediate composition can be copied to a stream within this project file.With Separator
calculations further information Viz. Total GOR ,Gas Gravity and Oil Gravity are also provided
through a More option.

This option closes down the display and passes the control back to the input screen

This option closes down both the calculation and the input displays and passes the control
back to the main PVT screen.

This sends all or part of the results data to the clipboard by calling the Copy to Clipboard
Dialog

If a hydrate formation Pressure calculation is done the analysis button is replaced by an export
version. This allows direct output to an ASCII file which can be taken into Prosper.

The Calculation table provides 2 alternative values for Oil Density i.e. EOS and KATZ. The

EOS value
while derivesstems
the other strictlyfrom
from the
the Equation of State
composition value
being for into
input Compressibility z and PV=zRT
a Standing-Katz density
correlation. The values in combination can be used as a guide to the appropriateness of the

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 220/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 15 -55

values used to generate the EOS model e.g. BI coefficients, acentric factors , pseudo
characterisation etc.
The EOS density is used in all subsequent calculations for FVF ,GOR etc.  
More values can be viewed by using the horizontal and vertical scroll bars provided.

The screen shows the compositions and calculated K values for each temperature and
pressure combination.
The other information presented depends on the caculation.The example below is for CCE

Constant
Composition
Expansion
 Analysis
Display

Thetemperature
the temperaturearea
value displayed
( top left). can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow within
The pressure value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow within the
pressure area ( top right).

The command buttons perform the following functions:

Close down the display and return to the calculation screen.

This sends all or part of the analysis data to the clipboard by calling the Copy to Clipboard
Dialog

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 221/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

16 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This option allows the user to save the composition( total,vapour or liquid)being stored as a
separate PVT file for later retrieval.
 Alternatively, a stream can be created within the current PVT Project File.
The analysis display for a separator calculation is more complex.

Clicking on the Quality Button will automatically generate a quality plot of the type
shown below. Background to this plot is descibed in the utility menu help for the
Hoffmann Quality Plot. If the properties of the components give a consistent flash, the
light components should roughly fall along a straight line.

 Analysis
Quality Plot

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 222/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 17 -55

There are two forms:.

This dialog is called by clicking on the Clipboard button within the Calculation Results Dialog.

 Among the option available are to include the results column names and/or units. In addition
the order of the results within the table can be reversed. To send the data to the clipboard,
click on OK.

This dialog is called by clicking on the Clipboard button within the Calculation Analysis Dialog.

 Among the option available are to include the analysis column names .All the analysis created
within the calculation on the target stream can be sent to the clipboard by clicking on option
2.The last option indicates whether data other than the compositions should be sent.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 223/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

18 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

 A CVD calculation can be initiated by selecting the Constant Volume Depletion option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Constant Volume Depletion is a flash process where the volume of the system at Dew Point is
preserved. At each flash stage volume in excess of this is removed as excess gas.
The excess gas products, i.e. equal to the increase in volume over the initial value, are
removed at each stage to become the wellstream production.
The liquid and gas equal to the initial volume goes on to be flashed at the next set of
conditions.
The CVD calculation concentrates on the gas and liquid left in the reservoir, while the
(Section 8.6) is used to find the produced gas (Wellstream) data. For
example, the GOR displayed for the CVD is that of the oil within the reservoir.
The CVD screen has only a manual mode.
The CVD screen has an Automatic and Manual Method. The normal mode is User Selected as
PVT reports only have a small number of steps. The Automatic mode allows the user to
introduce a larger number of small steps. This better represents the calculation path of a
program like MBAL. A typical manual mode display being shown in figure 8.12.
Entries are provided for the temperature at which the process is to be carried out and the
pressure stages involved in the operation.
 A button removes all entries.
The button copies across the entries which have been made for the
Depletion Study calculation.

The CVD input displays contain a section for . This allows the user to define a
separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the and .
The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change
the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When multiple
samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have individual separator settings for
each stream. In this case, the radio button should be clicked on. The stream
separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table.All stages do not
need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.The
within the separator data area switches the correction on and off. The values within this
separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those within the Separator

calculation.Data
Separator The area.The buttonbutton
will copy the stages
removes from the
all values Separator
from Calculation
within the SeparatorintoData
the
area.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 224/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 19 -55

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.See PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details. 

Gas Heating Values


The gas gross and net heating values are now calculated as columns within the calculation
table. The value given is derived from the composition of the accumulated gas after sending
the fluid through the indicated separator train.

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

The calculation screen shows two Oil Densities for comparison purposes. The EOS value is
determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid compressibility Z. This value
is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity,Oil FVF and GOR. The second value
is taken from the correlation put forward by Standing and Katz. The non-predictive nature of
the Equation of State method and its weakness in calculating liquid properties makes the
value of Oil Density particularily suspect in non-matched systems. The EOS Density is
,however, sensitive to composition and property changes, making it a suitable value for
matching and regression.

The Standing-Katz value is empirically derived and in our experience predicts well the density
of most fluids. The average nature of the number and its lack of sensitivity make it unsuitable
for regression.

Matching the EOS density to good experimental data usually results in the two densities
having very similar values. Conversely, if the values are very disimilar, it usually means that
good matching has not been achieved.

In common with all the grids within the PVTp program the main grid within this display can be
copied onto the clipboard by selecting all the cells and typing Control+C. Pasting from the
clipboard is done by clicking within the target cell and typing Control+V.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 225/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

20 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

CVD Input Screen

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 226/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 21 -55

 A DEPL calculation can be initiated by selecting the Depletion Study option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
The Depletion Study is similar to a (Section 8.5) . The
process is the same. The difference between them lies in the emphasis of the
calculations undertaken.
 A Depletion Study is used where the main product is the gas removed at each stage. The
calculations are designed to provide an insight into the Wellstream properties and composition
as the reservoir depletes
The Depletion Study is a flash process where the volume target is kept constant throughout
the stages. The excess gas products, i.e. equal to the increase in volume over the initial value,
are removed at each stage to become the wellstream production.
The composition, produced mole% and Surface GOR of this wellstream gas are reported.
In addition a Cumulative Production figure is worked out from the value which is
input by the user.
The liquid and gas equal to the initial volume goes on to be flashed at the next set of
conditions.A Resevoir Liquid Dropout is also reported.
The DEPL screen has only a manual mode (figure 8.11a).
Entries are provided for the temperature at which the process is to be carried out and the
pressure stages involved in the operation.
 A button removes all entries.
The button copies across the entries which have been made for the
Depletion Study calculation.

The DEPL input displays contain a section for . This allows the user to define
a separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the and
. The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly
change

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 227/445
098031T422rA82me500002m4m
2368n133r34m2368 8cV011n1LsSO
32m4m2368n13TETEMCP<
<MCD198001098133113yT 1cEg1suresv46981185575001098 530397533635essuresv4698118411
1T98ssuresv4sv4698R9813311133111331331113311133C4830BTBT00011Tck3Ch00511s4CBTTT31T2368 TT31T2368 T43109808 a28beaseparaor ro e9g1528b
w109844TT31echareusedo ncan yT 00012Tc0027sRd 9s26r1731F753234277Tm T1004804C0a9TmTheDEPL 9809T002m4m2368n14r001098133113yTv4644Tm p4644Tmp4644Tme0488Tw1098001esm4752yT41855753234277Tm T4475cspayscon75754
7T38d97W00c9 s26r1731980a3pa359783108281oepa31rc5<
p10980 01es34h34Cm111339G11s4CBTTT31T236ek592or T107T31es34h34CC98RTT31163873Ch0esm4752T068n12cv46430253234277Tm T447574T5183h8d97
W00c798o4Twe6<n1e2313y4921esm4752yT41855753eparaor9s26r1731980 a3pssm3361g100c798o4Tworo0012Tc0027sRd 97111339G11s4CBTTTw2h394CB
T6BTB48pT236ek892m4m2368n12G11s4CBTTTw2e1002m
4m2368n14r00esm4aorD8nd oe9g1528
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

22 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.See PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details. 

The calculation screen shows two Oil Densities for comparison purposes. The EOS value is
determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid compressibility Z. This value
is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity,Oil FVF and GOR. The second value
is taken from the correlation put forward by Standing and Katz. The non-predictive nature of
the Equation of State method and its weakness in calculating liquid properties makes the
value of Oil Density particularily suspect in non-matched systems. The EOS Density is
,however, sensitive to composition and property changes, making it a suitable value for
matching and regression.
The Standing-Katz value is empirically derived and in our experience predicts well the density
of most fluids. The average nature of the number and its lack of sensitivity make it unsuitable
for regression.
Matching the EOS density to good experimental data usually results in the two densities
having very similar values. Conversely, if the values are very disimilar, it usually means that
good matching has not been achieved.

In common with all the grids within the PVTp program the main grid within this display can be
copied onto the clipboard by selecting all the cells and typing Control+C. Pasting from the
clipboard is done by clicking within the target cell and typing Control+V.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 228/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 23 -55

DEPL Input
Screen

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 229/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

24 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

 A DIFF calculation can be initiated by selecting the Differential Expansion option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Differential Expansion or Liberation is a flash process where all the gas products are removed
at each stage. The liquid goes on to be flashed at the next set of conditions.
The Differential Liberation screen has only a Manual Method , a typical display being shown in
figure 8.12.
Entries are provided for the temperature at which the process is to be carried out and the
pressure stages involved in the operation. A button removes all entries.

◊ The liquid in the initial stage of a differential liberation , by definition, be at Bubble


Point. Any gas detected by the calculation is ignored and does not appear in any calculated
value.
◊ The calculation is very sensitive to the number of steps and the value of each step. Taking
a different route to the end point gives very different results
◊ The calculation of GOR is carried out with respect to the Residual Volume of the oil making
it very sensitive to each step and particularily to the last. A last step to atmospheric is
normal. Unlike the other calculation all stages must be complete before the values at each
stage can be properly calculated.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 230/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 25 -55

Differential
Liberation
Input Screen

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

The calculation screen shows two Oil Densities for comparison purposes. The EOS value is
determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid compressibility Z. This value
is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity,Oil FVF and GOR. The second value
is taken from the correlation put forward by Standing and Katz. The non-predictive nature of
the Equation of State method and its weakness in calculating liquid properties makes the
value of Oil Density particularily suspect in non-matched systems. The EOS Density is
,however, sensitive to composition and property changes, making it a suitable value for
matching and regression.
The Standing-Katz value is empirically derived and in our experience predicts well the density
of most fluids. The average nature of the number and its lack of sensitivity make it unsuitable
for regression.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 231/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

26 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Matching the EOS density to good experimental data usually results in the two densities
having very similar values. Conversely, if the values are very disimilar, it usually means that
good matching has not been achieved.

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.See PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details. 

In common with all the grids within the PVTp program the main grid within this display can be
copied onto the clipboard by selecting all the cells and typing Control+C. Pasting from the
clipboard is done by clicking within the target cell and typing Control+V.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 232/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 27 -55

 A COMPOS calculation can be initiated by selecting the Composite Differential Expansion


option from the calculation menu
 As suggested by the name this option is very like the standard Differential Expansion or
Liberation . COMPOS is a flash process where all the gas products are removed at each
stage. The liquid goes on to be flashed at the next set of conditions.
Unlike the standard DIFF, the GOR and FVF of the excess vapour estimated for the composite
option is not calculated with respect to the residual volume. Instead the values are arrived at
in a similar way to a CCE or CVD calculation i.e. by doing a series of separator flashes back to
stock tank conditions. If no separator stages are entered a single flash is carried out. This
removes the heavy dependence on the number of steps and the accuracy of estimating the
residual oil which characterises Differential Liberation. It also is closer to what happens in a
reservoir.

The Composite Differential Liberation calcualtion is similar to the standard version , a typical
input dialog is shown in figure 8.12a

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 233/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

28 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Composite
Differential
Liberation
Input Screen

The difference lies in the standard separator input section at the bottom of the dialog.
The button will copy across entries from the standard Differential Liberation
calculation.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 234/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 29 -55

 A Separator calculation can be initiated by selecting the Separator option from the calculation
menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
The Separator Process flashes the mixture at a fixed set of conditions. The liquid and gas are
split off to go on to the next stage of the process.
The Separator option has only one input mode.
 A Separator Input screen has Data entry boxes which are provided for up to 20 separator
stages. Enter the pressure and temperature of each stage and click on the Calculate control
button.

Two modes are available VIZ. or . In mode all streams will be


calculated with the same separator conditions.

Separator
Process Input
Screen

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 235/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

30 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

In mode all streams will be subjected to their own separator conditions. The tabs at
the bottom of the grid can be used to move between the stream inputs.
The will set all stream settings to the current stream value.

Separator
Process Input
Screen

The separator calculation screen is the same as that described for Constant Composition
Expansion (section 8.4)
The analysis screen is also much the same as that described in section 8.4.2. The difference
is that the More control button now becomes active . Clicking on this brings up a display of the
type shown in figure 8.12. giving GOR ,Oil gravity and Gas Gravity values for the selected.

The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.See PVT Project
File Structure for more information on streams.

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details. 

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 236/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 31 -55

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

The calculation screen shows two Oil Densities for comparison purposes. The EOS value is
determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid compressibility Z. This value
is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity,Oil FVF and GOR. The second value
is taken from the correlation put forward by Standing and Katz. The non-predictive nature of
the Equation A by10.98 136.7459 597.9213 TEquation A by10.98 136.74t3s p119.7009 732.5003

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 237/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

32 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Separator
Process
 Analysis
Screen

Separator
Process
 Analysis
Summary
Table

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 238/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 33 -55

Clicking on the Quality Button will automatically generate a quality plot of the type shown
below. Background to this plot is descibed in the utility menu help for the Hoffmann Quality
Plot. If the properties of the components give a consistent flash, the light components should
roughly fall along a straight line.

Separator
Process
 Analysis
Quality Plot

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 239/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

34 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

 A Compositional Gradient calculation can be initiated by selecting the Compositional Gradient


option from the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Compositional Gradient calculates the changes in composition with depth above and below
the reference depth.
The calculation input screen comes in two forms viz. Automatic (figure 8.15) and User
Selected Entry (figure 8.16).

 A typical input screen is given in figure 8.15


The display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected and
automatic modes. The reservoir reference conditions are also displayed . These variables
cannot be changed from this display . Use the Data | Reference Data option (section 7.7) if a
change is required.
In addition, data boxes are provided for entering the limits of the depth to be covered above
and below the reference depth and the number of points to be calculated for each direction.
The points will be spread evenly throughout the ranges selected. A check box is provided for
swapping between relative and absolute depths.
Temperature Gradient must also be entered in the appropriate box.
 
To initiate the calculation click on the Calculate control button. The Calculation Screen and its
options are described in section 8.9.1

 As part of the gradient calculation, the saturation pressure of the mixture can be calculated at
each depth. Since this calculation takes some time the option is given to leave out the
calculation. Both and dialogues contain a check box for this option.
If the Saturation Pressure is calculated a plot with Pressure Gradient against depth becomes
available . A typical plot is shown in figure 8.15a.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 240/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 35 -55

 Auto Mode
Gravitational
Gradient

the additional information on the plot i.e. Reference Depth,Reference Pressure etc.
using the Match point colour (see Plotting)

The small table allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.Selected
stream are highlighted in red.
See PVT Project File Structure for more information on streams.
The reservoir reference conditions are also displayed within this table . These variables can
be changed from this display .
 Alternatively, option can be used to view or change thes values.
 An input screen contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected
and Automatic modes.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 241/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

36 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

The COMPGRAD input displays contain a section for . This allows the user to
define a separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the
and . The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
When multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have individual separator
settings for each stream.
stream separator settings In this
can becase, the via the tabs
accessed radio button
at the should
bottom be table.All
of the clicked on. The
stages
do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.The
within the separator data area switches the correction on and off. The values within
this separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those within the Separator
calculation. The button will copy the stages from the Separator Calculation into the
Separator Data area.The button removes all values from within the Separator Data
area.

Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTp program (see Section 4.6). 
Only one model is active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo
box which appears on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.

 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 242/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 37 -55

 A typical input screen is given in figure 8.16


The display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap between User Selected and
automatic modes. In addition, 10 data boxes are provided for entering the depths above and
below reference depth at which the gradient is to be calculated. The points do not need to be
evenly spread.
 As in the Automatic mode, an entry is also required for temperature gradient and a check box
is provided for swapping between relative and absolute depths.
To initiate the calculation click on the Calculate control button. The Calculation Screen and its
options are described in section 8.9.1.
 

Compositional
Gradient
Manual Mode

To initiate the calculation click on the Calculate control button. The Calculation Screen and its
options are described in section 8.8.1

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 243/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

38 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

 A typical results display is shown in figure 8.17. The results are reported against the gradient
points entered. The controls on this display have the same effect as those described for
Constant Composition Expansion (section 8.4).

The calculation screen shows two Oil Densities for comparison purposes. The EOS value is
determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid compressibility Z. This value
is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity,Oil FVF and GOR. The second value
is taken from the correlation put forward by Standing and Katz. The non-predictive nature of
the Equation of State method and its weakness in calculating liquid properties makes the
value of Oil Density particularily suspect in non-matched systems. The EOS Density is
,however, sensitive to composition and property changes, making it a suitable value for
matching and regression.

The Standing-Katz value is empirically derived and in our experience predicts well the density
of
formost fluids. The average nature of the number and its lack of sensitivity make it unsuitable
regression.

Matching the EOS density to good experimental data usually results in the two densities
having very similar values. Conversely, if the values are very disimilar, it usually means that
good matching has not been achieved.

Compositional
Gradient
Calculation
Results
Display

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 244/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 39 -55

 A Swelling Test calculation can be initiated by selecting the Swelling Test option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
This option only becomes available if a second stream or more streams have been defined.
The Swelling Test mixes a pre-entered amount of the second stream with the first. The
Saturation Pressure of this new mixture is determined. The mixture is the flashed at the
Saturation Pressure to get the phase properties.
The Swelling Test option has only one input mode. A typical input display is shown in figure
8.18

 A Swelling Test Input screen has Data entry boxes which are provided for up to 10
temperatures. In addition 10 second stream compositions can be entered for each
temperature . When mixed these numbers represent the mole percent of the second stream
within the first. If the component exists within the first stream the values are added together
and the properties of the primary stream (eg from regression) are used for both. If no
component exists of the same type a new component is created with the properties shown for
the second stream.

The Swelling Test has two input options for composition VIZ

◊ Mole %
◊ Volume of gas per volume of oil

The input type is set by two radio buttons which are situated beneath the input columns.
When either option is selected, the other is automatically calculated aand appears on the
calculation display.

The unit for vol/vol input can be changed on the units display by scrolling down to the Swelling
Input unit. At present the units are set as volumes of gas at standard conditions being added
to oil at its saturation pressure. The first step in the calculation is therefore to find the
saturation pressure of the oil and the density at that pressure. This density allows the vol/vol
input to be translated to its equivalent mole % value. The calculation then proceeds as normal
using this value.

The button sets the compostions to a range between 0 and 90%.


The button removes all composioion entries.

Enter the temperatures and compositions required and click on the control button.

For each calculation carried out, the analysis display presents information on compositions K
values,gas and oil gravities etc. In addition, intermediate compositions can be extracted for
further work as separate files or streams . See Analysis Display for CCE 

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 245/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

40 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Swelling Test
Input Screen

The Swelling Test Saturation Pressure is available for matching

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 246/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 41 -55

Slim-tube Simulation

 A slim-tube calculation can be initiated by selecting the Slim-tube simulation option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
This cell to cell model simulates gas injection into an oil reservoir. The program sets
up a series of cells as shown in figure 1below.
The cells do not need to be the same size but usually are. The temperature of all the cells
remain the same at the initial reservoir value.
If the cell orientation is horizontal all the cells start at the designated reservoir pressure.If the
cells are inclined or vertical, the pressures are adjusted for the column of oil above the cell.

Fig 1 Slim-tube Simulator 


Injection gas
Wellstream

Excess Gas & Oil Excess Gas & Oil

Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell n

In each time step gas is added to the system. The gas injected into cell 1 is mixed with the
fluid there and the combination is flashed to find the new amount of gas and oil and their
properties.
Material Balance calculations and phase mobility criteria are used to calculate how much of
each phase is moved to cell 2. Again the new mixture is flashed and the excess is moved to
cell 3.
This process is repeated until the production cell is encountered. At this point the excess
volume and composition appear as wellstream products.
Whether multiple contact miscibility is achieved is usually taken from the estimation of the
minimum miscibility pressure (MMP). Definitions of the MMP can vary, but it is usually taken
as the pressure at which the recovery is 90% wnen 1.2 pore volumes of gas have been
injected. At pressures above MMP the gas is assumed to be miscible.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 247/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

42 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This Dialog is the main one for the slim tube simulation calculation. The reasoing behind the
calculation is described in Background to Slim-tube Simulation.
The screen is brought up by selecting the option from the main
Calculation menu.
The dialog gives access to the other slim tube setup dialogs i.e.
Cells Setup
Rel Perms Setup
Times and Material Balance Setup.

The slim-tube calculation is complex to set up. As it is trying to simulate a physical test , many
variables (physical sizesates permeabilities) have to be tuned to realistic values.
To help in this process a set of typical default values are provided. Clicking on this button will
fill all the Slim-tube dialogs with numbers which will work for most oil/gas combinations.
WARNING: Using this button will overwrite all previously entered data (except pressures) on

all Slim-tube dialogs.


The dialog has 2 modes and . Radio buttons are provided to switch
between modes.
 A typical Automatic mode display is shown in figure 8.19:

Slim-tube Input
Dialog

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 248/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 43 -55

 A pressure range is entered as a minimum and maximum pressure plus a number of steps. It
should be noted that the slim tube simulation is a complex calculation and can be slow.

If discrete pressure values are required the mode should be changed to and
the pressures entered as shown in figure 8.21:

Slim-tube Input
Dialog

The reservoir stream is the oil which will fill the slim-tube cells. The injected stream is the gas
which will be introduced to test its miscibility in the oil.

The slim-tube experiment is normally done at reservoir temperature. This value will default to
the entered reservoir temperature (see Reference Data) , but it can be changed to a different
value using the edit box provided.

The minimum miscibilty pressure (MMP) is normally taken as the pressure at which there is 90
percent oil recovery at 1.2 pore volumes of gas injected. Above this pressure the gas is taken
as being miscible. The test values can be changed from the defaults using the edit boxes
provided. The selected values appear as reference lines on the plot of recovery versus pore
volume injected. A typical plot is shown below:

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 249/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

44 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

Slim-tube Output
Plot

The number and dimensions of the cells within the slim-tube are setup in the Cells Setup
Dialog.

The relative permeabilities and associated data are entered within the Rel Perms Setup
Dialog.

The number and size of the time steps are setup within the Times and Material Balance Setup
Dialog.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 250/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 45 -55

will remove the current pressure inputs.

When all entries have been made click on Calc to bring up the Slim-tube Calculation Dialog.

Volume Shift 
 A volume shift control panel is proved to allow the user to setup and to switch on and off this
feature prior to calculation . See Volume Shift and Volume Shift Setup help for more details.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 251/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

46 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This Dialog sets up the dimensions and other data related to the cells that make up the slim-
tube. The display is called by the Slim-tube Input Dialog.
 A typical screen would be as in figure 8.23:

Slim-tube Cell
Data Dialog

The first step is to define the number of cells. The Production cell is normally the last and the
injection is the first. The depth is only for reference.
The cells are normally horizontal. in this case they are all at the same depth and pressure. If
they are vertical , they are at different pressures depending on the cell height and the oil
density.
The cells can contain the same data. to do this enter the data into cell 1 and click on the
button.
 Alternatively, all data can be individually entered within the table.
The first three columns define the dimensions of each cell . The last two indicate the Porosity
and Permeability of each cell.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 252/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 253/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

48 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This Dialog sets up the time steps and material balance options within the slim tube simulator.
The display is called by the Slim -tube Input Dialog.

 A typical screen would be as in figure 8.25:

Slim-tube time
steps Dialog

Enter the number of time steps required. This action will set the size of the table.
The times can be set as a fixed value or with a different value for each step.
To set the same time for each step click on the radio button and enter the
time required in the edit box provided.
If different times are required,click on the variable time step radio button and enter the times
within the table.

It should be noted that the program will automatically change the value of a timestep or add
more timesteps if it is failing to meet its convergence criteria.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 254/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 49 -55

This Dialog allows the user to initiate calculations and view the results
.
Slim-tube

Calculation
Dialog

The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Calculate button is pressed on the Slim-tube Input
Dialog.
The display is in the form of a table with a Cell Detail button as the first column. The properties
listed are those of the fluid exiting the last cell at the end of the time step.
The time steps listed may chage from those entered initially as the calculation will create new
values to reflect the intermediate flow changes within the model.

Clicking on any of these buttons will bring up the Cell Detail Dialog . This displays the phase
,properties and compositions in each cell at the selected timestep.Any composition can be
extracted as a strem for further analysis.(see PVT Project File Structure for more information
on streams)

If multiple pressures have been selected (see Slim-tube Input Dialog) the pressures appear
as separate tables with tags at the bottom. The user can move betwen the pressures by
clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the display.
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading.
ScroCellc3-9ition can be a54.04..0.94m0.911list29 410.9proaa 10.0438 Tm( )TjETEMC/P <
/MCID 15 >
B5

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 255/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

50 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

If the values have been already calculated the display will show the last set of values
calculated.

The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:

This option recalculates the table using the latest inputs provided

This generates a full sized plot of the calculated results.

This option produces a secondary screen giving the compositions calculated at each
measurement point along with details of the material balance found at the end of the time
step. The analysis screen also provides access to the function which allows the
user to export a particular line of the calculation to a PVT file. Alternatively, the intermediate
composition can be copied to a stream within this project file.

This option closes down the display and passes the control back to the input screen

This option closes down both the calculation and the input displays and passes the control
back to the main PVT screen.

This option allows the user to send the table results with/or without headings to the clipboard.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 256/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 51 -55

This Dialog is called by clicking on the Analysis button within the slim-tube calculation display.
The compositions shown are those of the fluids being produced from the designated
production cell.

The numbers within the table give an indication of the material balance of each component
after the timestep.

The composition within each cell can be viewed using the Slim-tube Cell Detail Dialog.

Slim-tube
 Analysis Dialog

The pressure run being viewed can be changed using the combo box provided.
The time step value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow on the
units or tens control.
Units will add or subtract 1 to the time step. Tens will add or subtract 10 to the time step.
The command buttons perform the following functions:

Close down the display and return to the slim-tube calculation display.

This option allows the user to save the composition( total,vapour or liquid)being stored as a
separate PVT file for later retrieval.
 Alternatively, a stream can be created within the current PVT Project File.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 257/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

52 - 55 PVTP  User Guide

This gives more detail on the contents of each cell during a time step. The display is called by
clicking on the button within the slim-tube calculation dialog.

Slim-tube Cell
Detail Dialog

For each cell the table gives details of the phase,cell pressure,IFT,oil saturation and oil and
gas viscosities. In addition the composition within the cell is given.
If the calculation goes into adaptive mode, the result number will not be equivalent to the time
step.
The cell compositions can be extracted to another stream for further analysis by:
1. Entering the required cell number in the edit box, or clicking on the arrow buttons until the
required value is reached.
2. Clicking on the Button.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 258/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 53 -55

 A subset of the Equation of Sate Calculations is available by clicking on the Quick Calc.
control button within the Recombination, Edit Composition and View Properties displays (see
Chapter 7)

Calculate
Button
Options

This feature provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation menu as a means of
checking the consistency of the entered composition information.

The small display (figure 8.30) provides options to calculate :

◊ Phase Envelope
◊ Critical Point (Temperature and Pressure)
◊ Saturation Pressure (at the reference temperature)
◊ Flash to Standard Conditions
◊ Flash Through Separator Stages
◊ Calculate Maximum Water in the Hydrocarbon Phase

The Phase Envelope and Critical Point calculations are identical to those described in sections
8.1 and 8.2 .The Saturation Pressure option does not use the same method as the ranged
equivalent (section 8.3) . The calculation is done at reference conditions only giving an output
of the type shown in figure 8.31

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 259/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 260/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 8 - Calculation EoS 55 -55

This display is called from the Quick Calculation Dialog.

Small
Separator
Calculation
Dialog

The objective is to provide a separator calculation which quickly provides the basic data of Oil
density and Gravity, Gas Gravity and GOR.

If separator conditions have already been defined the values will appear. If not enter the
temperatures and pressures in the Edit Boxes provided in the Values section of the display.
When ready click on
removes all entries and results.

PVTP  User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 261/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

9 Calculation of Solids

Waxes

Hydrates

9.1 Wax Amount Calculation

Automatic

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 262/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

 
Figure
9.1:

User Selected

 
Figure 9.2:

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 263/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Stream Selection

Model Selection

Pressure Range

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 264/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

9.1.1 The Analysis Display

Figure 9.3:

 
Exit

Extract

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 265/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

9.2 Wax Appearance Temperature

Automatic

 
Figure 9.4:

User Selected

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 266/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

 
Figure 9.5:

Stream Selection

Model Selection

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 267/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 
Pressure Range

Calc

Cancel

Calculation Limits

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 268/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 269/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Model Options

Inhibitor Data
Figure 9.7:

Clear Percents

Restrictions
1)

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 270/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

2)

Control Buttons

Calc

Cancel

User Selected

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 271/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 
Figure 9.8:

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 272/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

9.3.1 Calculations Dialog

Figure 9.9:

9.4 Hydrate Minimum Inhibitor Concentration

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 273/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 
Figure 9.10:

Procedure

Calc

Stream Selection

Model Options

Restrictions

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 274/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

1)

2)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 275/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 276/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 277/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 278/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

PVTP

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 279/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 280/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 281/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 282/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 283/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 284/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 285/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 286/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 287/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

11 Plotting
This section describes the reporting options and procedures used in the PVT plotting
functions.

11.1 The Plot Display


Plotting is available in many forms and is initiated by the plot  command button option on
many input and calculation screens. The plot window can also be removed by using the
File|Close menu option, typing Alt +F4, or pressing on the exit button.

The plot window contains may options which can be selected via a menu or toolbar. These
options are details in Plotting – Menu and Toolbar section (11.1.3). A plot can present data
form multiple stream calculations, allowing the user to visualise the effect of different
compositions,matching scenarios etc.The plot below shows the variation in liquid dropout
of samples taken at different depths.

Figure 11.1: 
Plot
Example
Liquid
Dropout 

11.1.1 Manipulating Streams


Clicking on the small square to the side of the stream name allows the user to manipulate
the plotting of the stream Clicking on this square brings up a small menu as shown below:

Clicking on Hide Stream will change all the curves belonging to this stream to the
background colour, hiding it.

The Show Stream option returns the stream curves to view.Individual curves can also be
hidden using the curve menu described below.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 288/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 10 PVTP User Guide

Clicking on Change Colour brings up the colour selection menu.

Figure 11.1.1: 
Plot Example
Liquid Dropout 

11.1.2 Manipulating Curves


On each plot is a set of small squares which indicate values from which the plot was
derived. Passing over a square with the mouse pointer brings up a small window which
gives the stream name and the point value.

Figure 11.1.2: 
Plot Example
Liquid Dropout 

Clicking on Hide Stream will change the individual curve to the background colour, hiding it.

The Show Stream option returns the stream curves to view.All streaml curves can also be
hidden using the stream menu described above.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 289/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 11 - Plotting 3 - 10

Clicking on Change Colour brings up the colour selection menu.:

Clicking on Point Settings allows the user to adjust the size and number of the points
shown for each curve in a stream.

Selecting this option brings up the small dialog shown below:

The Plot Point Ratio indicates what fraction of the points will be displayed. The example
above would show only one point in ten.

To show all points enter a value of one.

The Point size radio buttons allows the user to adjust the size of the Point Square.
 All point drawing can be switched off and on. See Labels and Options Dialog (Section
11.2.2)

PLOT TITLE
This may be adjusted if required . See Labels and Options Dialog (Section 11.2.2)

MAIN PLOT WINDOW


The main Plot window shows the curves drawn in engineering units.

LEGEND BOXES
Various legend boxes give additional information
Note the legend boxes and the plot labels can be switched off within the Labels.. dialog.

MOUSE POSITION INDICATOR


 A mouse position indicator (bottom right of main plot) which shows the current position in
the units of the plot. This function can be used to find the value of an intermediate point on
any drawn curve.

Figure 11.1 and 11.2 show 2 typical plots.

ZOOMING
 Any part of the plot can be enlarged by adopting the following procedure

1. Place mouse pointer at top left of the area to be enlarged.


2. Press the left mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button kept down , move the mouse pointer to the bottom right of
the required area. During this operation, a rectangle will be drawn to show the
area selected.
4. Release the mouse button . The enlarged plot will be drawn.

To return the plot to its original size , double-click the mouse anywhere within the main plot
area.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 290/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 10 PVTP User Guide

11.1.3 The Plot Menu and Toolbar


The plot window is composed of :

MENU
with SUBMENUS

1) File 

Printer Setup standard Windows Printer Setup display


Print
Exit

2) View

This menu allows the user to adjust what is seen within the display. Clicking on the menu
item will toggle off and on the particular option. The options are stored on a file by file

basis.

3) Display

Scales  Set the axes scales


Labels Set the Axes Label and Plot Title Text
Variables  Select the variables to be plotted
Colours  Select the colours of the various Plot Elements and sets pen size
Test Points ..Mearured points to be visualised but not necessarily matched to.
Units  Change the Units used within the plot
Redraw  the plot at its original size.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 291/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 11 - Plotting 5 - 10

4) Output
Report Bring up the main Report Display

TOOLBAR

 A toolbar with buttons for


 font
 colour
 Units
 Scales
 Labels
 Help
 Exit

and with many plots combo boxes which give access to plot variables.

Figure 11.2: 
Plot Example
Phase
Envelope 

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 292/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 10 PVTP User Guide

11.2 Plot Menu Options

11.2.1 File
The file submenu contains:

Printer Set-up 
Clicking on this option invokes the windows standard printer set-up screen as described in
Chapter 3.

Print
This option brings up the dialog shown in figure 11.3.

Figure 11.3: 
Print Plot

The margin area allows the user to enter top, bottom, left, and right margins.
The units of margin size can be selected using the Inches and Millimeters radio buttons.

The listbox on the right of the display shows the printers available , with the current choice
of destination highlighted.
To select another printer , click once on its name.

 A small panel with radio buttons gives the user the opportunity to select between the three
main colour schemes i.e. Monochrome, Greyscale or Colour .
Line Widths : It may be useful when printing a plot which may subsequently be faxed to
increase the line width This can be done via the Colours option within the main display

The control buttons on the display have the following functions:

Print
Close the display and print report with current settings via the standard print control dialog
shown below

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 293/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 11 - Plotting 7 - 10

Cancel
Close the display without printing the report

11.2.2 Display
The Display submenu contains:

Scales 
To change the scaling of the plot click on this option, enter the values required in the
Change Scales display (figure 11.4) and press OK. The plot will be redrawn automatically.

Figure 11.4: 
Change Scales 

Labels
To change the labels and title used within the plot click on this option, enter the labels
required in the Change Labels display (figure 11.5) and press OK. The plot will be redrawn
automatically.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 294/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 10 PVTP User Guide

Figure 11.5: 
Change Labels 

Clicking off the Show curve labels on plot will remove the small curve labels.

Clicking off the Show legend boxes on plot will remove the legend boxes, increasing the
size of the main plot.

Clicking off the Show Reference Data Lines will remove the indication of reference depth,
reference pressure and reservoir temperature.

Clicking off the Show Individual Plot Points will remove the small squares on the curves
which represent actual values (see Main Plot Dialog section 11.1 for more details).

Colours 
This option has the same result as that described for clicking on the Colours.button within
the toolbar (see section 11.3)

Units
This brings up the unit selection display in a similar way to the main menu Options|Units
option (see section 3.4).

Redraw
Selecting this option redraws the plot window.

11.2.3 Output
The file submenu contains:

Report
This option brings up the user report window as described in Chapter 9.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 295/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 11 - Plotting 9 - 10

11.3 The Toolbar Options


 As a standard the plot window toolbar contains 3 control buttons which have the following
functions

Fonts... 
This option allows the user to change the fonts used in the plot. Figure 11.8 shows a
typical fonts choice display.

Figure 11.8: 
Plot
Fonts

This screen allows the user to select a font for each of the text plot elements listed. First
select a plot element by clicking on a name in the list, then use change button to choose
the text characteristics that you require. An example of your choice is given in the dialog

panel. Clicking
selection windowon. Pressing
OK  will change thechange
Apply will font in the
the plot
plotwithout
being viewed
closing and close down the
the window.

Colours 
Clicking on the Colours.  Control Button or on Change Colour   within the small point or
stream menu (section 11.1) or on the Colours Option within the Main Plot Dialog Display
Menu brings up this dialog.

Figure 11.8: 
Plot
Colours 

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 296/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 10 PVTP User Guide


This option allows the user to change the colours used in the plot and set the default for all
new plots. This screen allows the user to select the colour for each of the text plot
components listed.

First select the colour scheme to be applied to the plot i.e. Colour , Gray Scale  or
Monochrome.

Next select a plot component by clicking on a name in the list. The sample panel will show
the current colour.

Press change to bring up the standard color selection dialog shown below. Choose the
colour that you require and press OK. The sample panel will show your choice.
The line width can also be set up on this display . To change a line width press on the
required check box and press OK. Thicker lines are useful when printing out plots
particularily for Fax use.

Clicking on OK  will change the colours in the plot being viewed and close down the
selection window. Pressing Apply will change the plot without closing the window.

Clicking on Save Colours will save all the colour selections to disk to be applied as default
to all new plots.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 297/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual




Figure 12.1:

12.1 API/Density Calculator

Calc

Calc

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 298/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

12.2 Mass Balance Calculator

OIL

OIl

Validate

Calculate

 Figure 12.2:

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 299/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Calculate Missing Value

GAS

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 300/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

12.3 Enthalpy Balance Calculator

12.3.1 Single Point Enthalpy Balance

Calc

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 301/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12.3.2 Multiple Point Enthalpy Balance

Auto Mode

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 302/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

User Selected Mode

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 303/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12.4 Hoffmann Quality Plot

Equilibrium Constants for a Gas-Condensate System by A. E. Hoffmann, J. S. Crump and

C.R. Hocott, Trans.,AIME(1953)198,1-10.

Calc

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 304/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

 Plot

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 305/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 306/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

13 User Databases
This section describes the setup and use of user databases.
 A Database menu has been added to the main PVTp screen. The dialogs within this allow
the user to create and maintain a set of customised component databases. In addition an
import facility has been added to extract components from the petroleum experts or other
user-created databases.

The databases can therefore be made up of entirely new components or existing


components with some properties adjusted. The user database points are held within an
 ASCII file with a UDB extension. The directory where these files are stored is saved within
the Prosper.ini file. This directory can be set using the Set User database Directory button
which calls the User Database Directory Dialog.
Once created , the databases can be used via the Select Components Dialog.

Using
database 

If any *.UDB files exist their names will be displayed in the combo box provided. If the file
has been created with user data, but the specific UDB file is not on the users machine the
components will be listed within the user area for identification but cannot be extended or
reset to the original *.UDB values. See example in figure 13.2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 307/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2-6 PVTP User Guide

Database not
present 

Creating
database 

This dialog is called from the Database Menu. The dialog allows the user to create an
empty user database file (extension . UDB) and go on to add components via the
database edit and database import dialogs.
 A typical display is shown in figure 13.3:

The procedure followed ia as follows:


Enter the database name and either select
to create an empty file or
to begin populating the file with components (see User Database : Edit
Dialog).
The button brings up the User Database:Directory Dialog
which sets up where the file will be stored.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 308/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 309/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4-6 PVTP User Guide

Editing
database

his dialog is called from the Database Create Dialog or from the Database Menu. The
feature allows the user to add or remove componets from a user database. The properties
of each component can be adjusted manually or calculated. All the data is read from and
saved to an ASCII *.UDB file. A typical display is shown in figure 13.5

The minimum amount of data required is a short name (16 characters) , a long name (50
characters) and a molecular weight.The option will give reasonable values
for all missing data based on several criteria , starting with molecular weight.All fields can
be edited.

The main control fields are as follows:

Editing
database 2

This allows the user to select the database to be edited.The


button brings up the User Database:Directory Dialog which sets up where the file is
stored.This area also contains a field which indicates the version of database by giving
when it was last edited.

Editing
database 3

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 310/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 13 - User Databases 5-6

These combo boxes allow the user to select which correlations are used to determine the
propertie sif required of the larger species within the database. The same correlations are
used within the Pseudo Properties Dialog.

 All changes are saved to the database file and the dialog is closed.

 All changes are ignored and the dialog is closed.

 All table entries are cleared.

 As indicated above this option allows the user to fill in any properties with reasonable
values based on the component's molecular weight etc.

This option brings up the Database Import Dialog. Within this display the user can select
components from any other user database or from the Petroleum Experts database to
import into the database being constructed. The p[roperties can then be adjusted within the
edit database dialog.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 311/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6-6 PVTP User Guide

Editing

database 

Within this display the user can select components from any other user database or from
the Petroleum Experts database to import into the database being constructed. The
properties can then be adjusted within the Edit Database Dialog.
 A typical display would be as shown in figure 13.8.

The left hand area of the dialog allows the user to select any of the Petroleum Experts
components. To the right the user can call up any predefined user database and select
components for import. When all selections have been made click on to
import the values.
The button brings up the User Database:Directory Dialog
which sets up where the file is stored.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 312/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 Preferences
This section describes the options available from the Preferences section of the
main PVT menu The magor option is called:

Calculation
Tolerences 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 313/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2-3 PVTP User Guide

Selecting the Calculation Tolerences option from the Preferences menu produces
the font selection screen shown in Figure 13.1

This Option is called by clicking on Calc. Tolerences within the Preferences Menu.
These variables are normally set to the default values and should not be changed
for the majority of systems.
The values are stored along with each file allowing the user to customise them on a
file by file basis.
 A flag is available to switch on and off the on a file by
file basis. Running with this check on is more secure with problem fluids but there is
a considerable penalty in speed. The Phase Determination numbers below refer to
the advanced method.
The following variables are available for change:

There is a phase determination function which is used throughout the Equation Of


State Calculations. The function starts at a high pressure and goes down in steps
until a two phase area is detected. This value limits the number of steps allowed
before the function is stopped with a single phase at all pressures assumed.
Increasing the value will slow down the PVT calculations.

There is a phase determination function which is used throughout the Equation Of


State Calculations. The function starts at a high pressure and goes down in steps
until a two phase area is detected. This value limits the smallest allowed step
before the function is stopped with a single phase at all pressures assumed.
Decreasing the value will slow down the PVT calculations.Increasing the value may
cause phase changes to be missed.

The BUT Library is at the core of all the Equation Of State Calculations. This value
controls the action of many programs within the Library , limiting the number of
times a solution is sought in any particular subroutine.Adjusting this value will have
an indeterminate affect on the systems accuracy and performance.

The BUT Library is at the core of all the Equation Of State Calculations. This value
controls the action of many programs within the Library ,limiting the accuracy
sought in any particular subroutine. If a more precise solution is required the value
should be increased. Adjusting this value will have an indeterminate affect on the
systems accuracy and performance.

This value relates to the number of regression cycles which will be done before the
calculation automatically exits. Raising the value will allow more time for a slowly

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 314/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

Chapter 14 -Preferences 3-3

regressing system to find a solution . No upper limit has been set , but any value
lower than 10 will be set to the lower allowed limit of 10.

The compositional Gradient is a stepwise process. When a target depth is entered

for regression
meaningful , theMore
result. program
stepsmust insert means
normally a series
a of intermediate
more depths to get
accurate estimation. a
The
disadvantage is a much lower cycle time for regression.
10 steps represents a reasonable compromise value.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 315/445
06
3 u p 0 /aaB1/a8
8 aB1/a8
aB1/
a a sC T0 3 g 0 S cV 11c1g42641nCposnor 
8
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix A - Worked

Examples
A1 Example 1 - EOS calibration of oil sample using PVTP  

“The aim of this exercise is to demonstrate how the PVT Package can be used to build an
equation of state (EOS) model for an oil sample. Even though the current example deals with
oil, the steps outlined is applied to any other type of hydrocarbon system.”

The objectives of this example are:

• To familiarise the user with building EOS models in PVTP.


• To use PVTP to calibrate the EOS models to measured laboratory experiments.
• To generate PVT tables for various applications.

This example will take the user through the following steps:

Building an EOS Model


• How to set up a PVTP model
• How to enter the composition of the fluid
• How to characterise the heavy ends
• How to define the binary interaction coefficients

Calibrating the EOS Model


• How to match the saturation pressure
• How to match the separator results
• How to match the constant composition expansion results.

Using PVTP to Generate tables


• How to generate black oil tables for MBAL
• How to generate black oil tables for PROSPER.
• How to generate black oil tables for Eclipse
• How to generate the EOS input data for PROSPER.

This example is in the samples directory under “ samples/pvtp/example1.pvi”


Input Data 
Reservoir Fluid Composition

Component Mole Percent


N2  0.05
CO2  0.15
C1  37.6
C2  9.7
C3  9.8
C4  6.6
C5  4.3
C6  3.5
C7+  28.3

Reservoir Data:

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 316/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Producing Interval Depth 10000-10050 feet


Reservoir Pressure 4000 psig
Reservoir Temperature 199.4 degF

Saturation Pressure Data

Saturation pressure at 199.4 degF: 2800.0 psig

Separator Data

 A multi stage separator experiment performed on the reservoir fluid resulted in the following
results:

Stage Pressure Temp. degF GOR Oil Density


(Psig) (scf/stb) (API)
#1 500 90 500
#2 0 60 300 34.2*

*34.2 API = 853.953 kg/m3 

Constant Mass Expansion Experiment results:

The results of the constant mass study at done of the sample at 199.4 degF are:

Oil Viscosity (cP) Oil Density


Pressure in psig
(Kg/m3)

Psat  2800 0.470 693.60


3100 0.495 697.55
3400 0.520 701.20
3700 0.542 704.66
Pres  4000 0.565 707.96

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 317/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 3 - 57

A1.1 Step-by-step approach to building an EOS model in


PVTP 

1. Defining the System Options


The first thing that needs to be defined is the options. For the selections of the right options,
you click on |Options |Options and then select the following options.

Figure A.1.1: 
Options Input Screen

In this screen, we are indicating that we will use EOS modelling and the EOS we will use is
Peng Robinson. You hit on OK to complete this.

i) You can also model fluid behaviour as a Black Oil in PVTP. 


  ii) The other Equation of State that is available is the Soave Redlich
Kwong (SRK). You can also define a customised equation of state. 

2. Units Selection in PVTP:


The default Units System in PVTP is Oilfield Units. If you are using another set of units you will
have to reset the units system. To do so click on Options |Units and then set the Input as well
as the Output Units to Oilfield as done below:

i) You can set the whole set to another system like French S.I. 
  ii) You can also change the units of a particular variable within a unit
system by clicking on the unit next to it and selecting a new unit
from the list that is displayed. 

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 318/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.2: 
Unit Selection Screen

3. Component Selection 
In order to select the components, you hit on Data|Select Components. To select components
in the screen shown below click on the desired components. The selected ones will be
highlighted. Once you finish the pure component selection, enter the number of pseudo-
components in the bottom right hand corner of the screen.

Figure A.1.3: 
Component Selection
Screen

i) You can un-select any selected component by clicking on it again.


  ii) We strongly recommend to start with a single pseudo.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 319/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 5 - 57

4. Entering the fluid composition


On the previous screen once you defined the components, hit on Edit Composition which will
bring up the following screen, where the compositions are entered as shown:

Figure A.1.4: 
Component Input
Screen

On this screen, the reservoir conditions i.e., pressure temperature and depth at which the
sample is taken are also entered.

5. Defining the Pseudo-Component


The next step is characterising the C7+ component. Clicking on the Pseudo Props does this.
Button of the above screen. This takes you to the following screen, whereby you enter the
specific gravity and molecular weight of the C7+ component.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 320/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.5: 
Pseudo-Component
Entry screen.

The specific gravity entered here is 0.871 and the molecular weight is 275. On basis of these
numbers, we calculate the boiling point and the Tc, Pc etc using the correlations.

Figure A.1.6: 
Pseudo-Property Calc.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 321/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 7 - 57

To do so press Calc Values on the previous screen. The correlations used are Petroleum
Experts for boiling point and TWU / Edminister for critical properties. This thus calculates the
pseudo-properties on basis of the correlations.

i) There is a utility called Quick Calc. In many input screens of PVTP,


  which allows you to study the general model behaviour based on

ii) the parameters


We entered/
have entered calculated do far.
the compositions and calculated the Pseudo-
properties from correlations. We can use this utility to see how this
model will perform in terms of oil density predictions at surface
conditions.

To do so on the above screen, hit the Quick Calc button. The following screen appears. On
this screen, select the flash to Standard Conditions as shown.

Figure A.1.7: 
Quick Calc Screen.

Hit on Calc. On this screen, it gives the results of a single stage flash as shown below.

Figure A.1.8: 
Single-Stage Flash

results.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 322/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

 As can be seen from the calculation, with the current pseudo-characterisation, the oil density
after flash using the equation of state modelling is 15 API, which is very different from the 32
 API type oil we are getting.

To get a pseudo, which does give correct liquid density computation, we use the feature called

 Automatch in
screen, where PVTP.
by, youIfpress
we click
AutoOK on the
Match previous
button at thescreen,
bottomitleft
willhand
take corner.
us back to the following

i) Experience has shown that the liquid densities predicted by


  Standing and Katz method are always fairly close to the measured
density under atmospheric conditions, as the method is based on
the conservation of mass.

ii) Thus, during Auto Match, we iterate on the Heavy end parameters
until the EOS predicted density at surface is equal to the Standing
and Katz density calculated at surface.

iii) This usually provides a good starting point for calibrating the EOS
models further.

iv) During automatch, the difference between the two density values is
displayed as well. Ensure that this is small as automatch stops after
40 iterations. If the difference is still large, press automatch again to
perform 40 more iterations. Usually 40 iterations are enough.

Figure A.1.9: 
Using Auto Match

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 323/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 9 - 57

Once automatch is done, using Quick Calc. again gives the following results for a single stage
separation.

Figure A.1.10: 
Single-Stage Flash
results. After
 Automatch

The density calculated now is much more reasonable and very near what we have in the
laboratory reports. To come back to the Pseudo-Property input screen click on OK.

Once the pseudo is acceptable, it is recommend to save this information in a archive. To do so


on the Pseudo-input screen click on Store button on the bottom right hand side as shown in
figure A.1.9. To view the stored data click on View on the same screen. You should see the
following information stored.

Figure A.1.11: 
Stored Pseudo-
Properties

6. Defining the Binary Interaction Coefficients


Once the pseudo component has been characterised, the next step is to introduce binary
interaction coefficient between the components. To do so, from the Pseudo-property screen
figure A.1. 9 click on Exit and save. This takes you to the component input data screen, which
is figure A.1.4. On this screen click on B I Coeff. Button. This takes you to the following
screen, where you can define the binary interaction coefficients.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 324/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.12: 
Stored Pseudo-
Properties

i) You need to enter only the lower part of the full BI matrix. We have
  used only 0.05 between the C1 and pseudo in this case.

ii) You can also use the correlations for calculating theses values, by
hitting Calc. New Values.

iii) There are also two Reset buttons at Top which allow you to set
specific (pure/ all components) values in the matrix to zero.

To see the effect of introduction of Binary interaction coefficient on the saturation pressure, we
can again use the Quick Cal. Utility that appears on this screen as well. If we press on Quick
calc. and then select phase envelope on the screen shown in figure A.1.7, the following phase
envelope appears.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 325/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 11 - 57

Figure A.1.13: 
Phase envelope
with Quick Calc.

To see the impact of the binary interaction coefficient on saturation pressure, click on Set
Test Point on the above screen and enter the saturation pressure data as shown below

Figure
EnteringA.1.14: 
saturation
pressure data point.

i) Ensure that you have selected the data point to be plotted on the
  phase envelope as indicated at the bottom of the above

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 326/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Once this is done we can click on OK to take us back to the Phase envelope screen as
shown in figure A.1. 13. On this we can click on Expand he plot to see the whole plot. We can
see, the data point (shown as the blue +) with respect to the phase envelope as well.

Figure A.1.14: 
Phase envelope
versus measured
saturation
pressure data
point.

i) The EOS model we have at this stage is not respecting the fluid
  behaviour as seen in the laboratory data. The fluid behaviour at this
step is strictly governed by the PR equation of State and Tc, Pc
etc., data entered.

ii) To make the EOS model to replicate the fluid behaviour as seen in

the laboratory, we need to calibrate/ match the EOS model.


iii)  Also Note that PVTP has indicated that the system is a bubble
 point system, without the user having to define it using the in
built advanced phase detection algorithm. 

Press Exit on the graph to come to Quick Calc screen in figure A.1.13, click Exit on this screen
to go to screen shown in figure A.1.7. Click Cancel on this screen to come to BI Coeff screen
shown in figure A.12.Press Exit and Save on this screen to save the data input. This takes you
to the component input screen shown in figure.A.1.4. Click Exit and save on this screen and
this take you to the main PVT screen.

 At this stage you can save the file by going to File | Save as and the following screen appears.
You can browse to the directory you want to save the file in and save it there.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 327/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 13 - 57

Figure A.1.15: 
File Saving Dialogue

This finishes the data entry of for building the EOS model.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 328/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

A1.2 Step-by-step approach to Calibrating an EOS model in


PVTP 

1. Entering the measured data


The first step is entering the measured laboratory data. To do so, in the main PVTP screen, go
to Data | Enter Lab Data, and this will give the following screen. Enter the known data in the
relevant sections as shown:

Figure A.1.16: 
Entry of saturation
Pressure

To enter the CCE click on the CCE tab that appears on the screen shown above in figure
 A.1.16 and this takes you to the next screen, where the data is entered.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 329/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 15 - 57

Figure A.1.17: 
Entry of CCE data

Similarly enter the separator experiment data under SEP tab in the lab data screen as shown

Figure A.1.18: 
Entry of Separator
data

2. Selecting the Data to calibrate against/ match to


Once the data is entered, we can again save the file as described earlier. To select the data
points that will be used in calibration, we will do the following

Disabling data points

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 330/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

16 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

The first step we take is to disable some data points in CCE density and viscosity
measurements to which the model will be matched to. To do so from the main Menu click on
Data | Enter lab data and select the CCE data tab as shown. On this select the both columns
of oil density and viscosity by holding the down the mouse and dragging across the cells you
want to disable. This selects the cells. Once the cells are selected, click on disable. This
disables the data, i.e. the data will not be used for matching.

Figure A.1.20: 
Disabling Lab CCE
data

i) The disabled data is shown in grey shading.


 
ii) A good model with predictive capabilities should use the
minimum data to calibrate and should predict other observed
behaviour within reasonable accuracy.

The next step is to include minimum data from this elaborate experiment and match the EOS
to it. We will select the density and viscosity at reservoir pressure and bubble point. Selecting
the data point by clicking on it to make the cell active does this. Once the cell is active, click on
include to include the data. You can also browse the weighting and select a number e.g. 5 and
hit set weighting to set weighting of data in the active cell /cells to 5.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 331/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 17 - 57

Figure A.1.21: 
Enabling Lab CCE
data / Setting
weighting

i) The enabled data is with a white background.


  ii) The low weighting cells appear in blue compared to black for the
high weighting cells

iii) We will give a medium weighting to density and viscosity at


reservoir conditions.

3. Matching the properties except viscosity


Once the properties that need to be matched against are selected, click OK to get out of lab
data entry screen. In the main Menu Click on Data | Regression and the following regression
screen appears. On this screen select all the data except viscosity for regression.

i) Note that you will need to scroll down to select all that against
  which you will regress the model.

ii) Ensure that viscosity is not selected as a regression variable at this


stage of matching.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 332/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

18 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.22: 
Selecting the data for
regression.

Click on Regress on this screen. This takes you to the next screen, where the parameters that
will be altered to match to lab data are chosen. Chose the Tc, Pc data of all components
except for the non-hydrocarbons and the binary interaction coefficient between heavy fraction
and methane, as indicated below and hit Regress.

Figure A.1.23: 
Selection of
Parameters to be
varied in regression.

Once the regression is done, there automatically appears the following screen showing the
tuned properties of all the components.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 333/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 19 - 57

Figure A.1.24: 
Tuned EOS
parameters.

On this screen, click on Exit and Save. It takes you back to the regression screen figure A.1.
23. On this screen click on Exit and save and it takes you back to the regression data
selection screen as shown in figure A.1. 22.

4. Matching viscosity.
Once the rest of data has been matched to, viscosity is matched separately. To do so un-
select the other parameters in the following screen and select viscosity only as shown

Scroll down the list to ensure that no other property except for viscosity is
  selected for regression.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 334/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

20 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.25: 
Selecting viscosity for
regression.

Once this is done in a similar fashion, go to the next screen by clicking on Regress and only
select the Pseudo-component critical volume for fine-tuning. Make sure that no Tc, Pc,
omega, binary interaction is selected as shown in the screen below

Figure A.1.26: 
Selection of Vc of
Pseudo to match
viscosity.

Once the matching is finished, the same screen as figure A.1.24 appears. Click on Exit and
save on this screen. This takes you to the regression screen on figure A.1.23. On this screen
press Exit and Save and it takes us to main regression screen shown in figure A.1.22. On this

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 335/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 21 - 57

screen click on PVT Main and this takes you to the main PVT screen., where you can save the
data and the results.

5. Checking results of the calibrated model against lab data.


Once the model is calibrated, we need to check the model predictions against the lab data.
The first comparison is the CCE experiment. To simulate a CCE experiment in PVTP, from the

mainwill
box menu go to
appear, Calculation
where | Constant
the range Composition
of pressure Expansion
and temperature and the following dialogue
is entered.

Figure A.1.27: 
Setting up CCE
Simulation input.

If we are also comparing oil FVF and GOR etc, we need to enter the
  separator scheme that these values were calculated against in the
CCE data. If we leave it blank all the GOR and FVF values reported
in the simulated experiment assume single stage atmospheric flash.

On this screen Press on Calc. This takes you to the next screen as shown below. On this
screen press Calc. again and the CCE calculations are performed.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 336/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

22 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.28: 
Simulated CCE
Results.

Once these calculation is finished, hit on plot and a plot will be displayed. On this plot select,
pressure versus the oil density (EOS) to be displayed. The selection is on the top of the plot in
the drop down menu as shown in the figure below:

Figure A.1.29 
Simulated CCE versus
lab oil density Results.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 337/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 23 - 57

On the same plot a comparison of oil viscosities looks as given below.

Figure A.1.30 
Simulated CCE versus
lab oil viscosity
Results.

Similarly other experiments like phase envelope, separator tests can be simulated and
checked against the measured data.

This concludes the EOS calibration stage.

A1.3 Using PVTP to generate Tables for other applications

1. Black Oil tables for Petroleum Experts


The Black Oil tables for Petroleum Experts Applications are generated by going to File | Export
from the main menu. This will result in the following dialogue screen to appear.

Figure A.1.31 
Black Oil Export
Dialogue Screen.

On this screen hit OK. This takes to the next screen, where the table pressures and
temperature is defined as shown below:

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 338/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

24 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.32 
Black Oil Export
Dialogue Screen.

i) You may also copy the CCE simulation experiment in the table to
  ii)
be exported by clicking on copy CCE button shown on the screen.
You may define tables at ten temperatures.
iii) You need not enter the saturation pressure for the table, PVTP will
calculate it automatically.
iv) On the right hand side Select, the table type, i.e., whether oil, gas or
condensate.

 As the table contains GOR and oil FVF information as well, you need to define a separator
train for this case. In case we do not define a separator train and atmospheric single stage
flash is considered. In this example we will define the separator train similar to the one used in
lab data. To do so on the above screen, click on Set Up under separator conditions and the
following dialogue appears,

Figure A.1.33 
Defining separator set
up for black oil table

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 339/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 25 - 57

On this screen enter the separator scheme. Click Use Separator to calculate GOR and oil
FVF.
Once this is done click on OK and it takes you back to the Export screen shown on Figure
 A.1.32. On this hit Calc. Table button. If you have more than one table selected for export, hit
Calc. all. This populates the table with PVT data as shown below. Once the table is filled, on

the right hand side press MBAL select. This selects the columns to be exported.

Figure A.1.34 
Populated
Black Oil table

On this click on Export and it will come up with the following dialogue

Figure A.1.33 
Black Oil table
Export

On this screen select current table option as we have only one table. Click on Export and it
takes to the following screen, where we can save a *.ptb file, which can be read by Petroleum
Experts applications.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 340/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

26 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.33 
Black Oil table Export

 
 At the end of this step you have a black oil table that can be used.
1. Black Oil tables for Eclipse
The Black Oil tables for eclipse are generated following the same route as was followed for
Petroleum Experts Applications. We start from File | Export from the main menu. This will
result in the following dialogue screen as shown in figure A.1.31 to appear. On this screen
select table Type 6 which is Eclipse Black oil Tables and hit OK.

This takes us to the following screen. On this screen, you have to select the type of black oil
tables that are needed.

Figure A.1.34 
Eclipse Black Oil table
Export

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 341/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 27 - 57

i) First you define the type of phase tables you want. In this case we
  want a oil with dissolved gas, the gas being dry and no water type
tables.
ii) Based on the phase types selected, applicable keyword Options
become available. We are using PVTO and PVDG for this example.

Once the proper options are selected, click on OK. This takes you the following screen, where
you define the pressure and temperature range for which the tables need to be generated.

You also define the separator scheme that will be used to calculate the GOR and oil FVF
values.

Figure A.1.35 
Eclipse Black Oil table
Export, Pressure and

Temp. Range Input

Once the data is input, click on Export and it takes you to the following screen, where the
tables are displayed. Click on Calculate to populate the tables.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 342/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

28 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.1.36 
Eclipse Black Oil table

Click on Export on the populated tables and it takes you to the save screen as shown below.

Figure A.1.37 
Eclipse Black Oil table
saves

You can save the table as a *.inc file which can be used by Eclipse. Click on PVT Main to
come back to the main screen.

2. EOS input for PROSPER  


The EOS input tables for PROSPER are generated following the same route as was followed
for the other two cases. We start from File | Export from the main menu. This will result in the
following dialogue screen as shown in figure A.1.31 to appear. On this screen select table
Type 1 which is PROSPER EOS Composition and hit OK.

This takes us to the following screen. On this screen, you have to select the appropriate option

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 343/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 29 - 57

Figure A.1.38 
EOS Export for
PROSPER

Once the option is selected, click on Export and it appears with a saving screen and as in
figure A.1. 37. Select the name for the file and it saves a *.prp file which can be imported
directly into PROSPER.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 344/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

30 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

A2 Example 2 - EOS calibration of a Condensate Sample


using PVTP
This objectives of this example are:

• To familiarise the user with using the Advanced Pseudo-Splitting Option in PVTP
• To use PVTP to calibrate the EOS models to measured laboratory experiments.
• To perform wax and hydrate studies on the condensate sample

This example will take the user through the following steps:

Building an EOS Model  

• How to characterise the heavy ends using the advanced splitting method.

Calibrating the EOS Model



How to match the saturation pressure
• How to match the separator results
• How to match the constant composition expansion results.

Simulating Experiments
• Study the calibrated EOS for wax appearance temperatures
• Find wax amount
• Perform hydrate formation study
• Work out hydrate inhibitor concentrations.

This example is in the samples directory under “ samples/pvtp/example2.pvi”

Input Data 

Reservoir Fluid Composition

Mole Percent Component


0.31 N2 
2.33 CO2 
68.73 C1 
12.37 C2 
5.01 C3 
2.71 C4 
1.4 C5 
0.96 C6 
6.18 C7+ 

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 345/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 31 - 57

Reservoir Data:

Producing Interval Depth 10000-10050 feet


Reservoir Pressure 5320 psig

Reservoir Temperature 255.0 degF


Saturation Pressure Data

Saturation pressure at 199.4 degF: 4800.0 psig

Separator Data

 A multi stage separator experiment performed on the reservoir fluid resulted in the following
results:

Stage Pressure (Psig) Temp. degF GOR (scf/stb) Oil Density


(API)
#1 500 100

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 346/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

32 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

 A Note about Liquid Dropout

i) There are two common ways of reporting the liquid drop out in
  laboratory reports:
•  As a % of the cell volume at dew point pressure.
•  As a % of cell volume itself.
ii) In the PVT Package, the dropout as % of the cell volume is to be
entered.
iii) If the lab reports the dropout as % of the dew point volume, this has
to be corrected. These reports also have a column called relative
volume in the reported in the CCE experiment.

• By definition the relative volume =  

= relative volume
= Total volume of the cell at given P,T
= Volume of the cell at the dew point pressure
iv) Thus to get liquid dropout as % of cell volume, we divide the liquid
dropout number expressed as % of dew point volume by the
relative volume.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 347/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 33 - 57

A2.1 Step-by-step approach to building an EOS model in


PVTP

1. Defining the Condensate System

i) The first is defining the options, selecting the components, and


  entering the composition as is indicated in the step by step
approach of example 1. The steps are exactly same.

ii) You start with one C7+ component and go through automatch etc
as indicated in example 1. The specific gravity is 0.8 and the
molecular weight is 180.

2. Splitting the heavy end.


Once the pseudo is characterised and automatched, we are at the following screen as shown.

Figure A.2.1 
Pseudo-Input Screen

On this screen press the Advanced button on the Split option at the bottom of the screen.

If you have more than one pseudo defined in the above screen, the
  advanced splitting is applied to the last pseudo only.

The advanced splitting dialogue takes us to the following screen on which using the internal
splitting algorithms, a distribution with carbon numbers of C7+ components is constructed as
shown.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 348/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

34 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.2.2 
 Advanced Splitting
Screen

i) For estimating the distribution of C7+ carbon numbers for a given


  ii)
system, there are various options available.
Petroleum Experts2 is the default option, which constructs an
extended distribution starting from C7 in such a way that the
average molecular weight and specific gravity of C7+ we started
with are honoured and as the carbon number increases, the mole
fraction decreases.
iii) There is also the Petroleum Experts 1 and Original method, both of
which calculate the extended distributions in such a a way that the
distributions tend to be centred around a particular carbon number.
iv) In case the user knows the individual mole fractions of the higher
carbon number, the follow profile method can be selected, which
will cause the split to be along the mole% profile entered by the
user.

The plot of the distribution with Petroleum Experts2 Method is shown below. This can be
done by pressing Plot on the above screen.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 349/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 35 - 57

Figure A.2.3 
Heavy end profile with
Petroleum Experts 2

If we want to choose the Petroleum Experts 1 as the splitting method, we click on Exit on the
above graph, which takes us to screen shown on figure A.2.2. On this select Petroleum
Experts1 and press Recalculate split. Once this is done hit again on plot.

Figure A.2.4 
Heavy end profile with
Petroleum Experts 1

 As indicated in above plot, this distribution is centred around C13 and thus has a maximum
there.

For this case we will use the default one i.e. Petroleum Experts 2. To switch back to it follow
the same sequence as was followed to construct Petroleum Experts1. Once this is done, we

will split this profile into two sub-groups by hitting on Set Even Split as shown in the following
screen.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 350/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

36 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.2.5 
Splitting the Pseudo

Once this is done, the program splits the heavy end into two groups, one from C7-C12 and
another C12+. If the user wants to change the range of carbon numbers in the sub-groups, it
can be done by scrolling up and down on the C13-C35 group.

Once the sub-groups are defined, click on Automatch. Once automatch is done, introduce a

binary interaction
screen as shown coefficient of 0.05 between C1 and C13+ by clicking BI Coeff on the above

Figure A.2.6 
BI Coeff. Entry

Click on Exit and save and it takes you back to the screen on figure A.2.5. Click again Exit and
Save through all the screens, till you are again in the main PVTP screen. On the main screen
save the file.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 351/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 37 - 57

A2.2 Calibrating an the EOS model in PVTP 


The first step is entering the measured laboratory data. To do so, follow the steps exactly
similar to example 1. From the main PVTP screen, go to Data | Enter Lab Data, and this will
give the following screen. Enter the known data in the relevant sections as shown:

Figure A.2.7 
Lab. Saturation
Pressure Entry

Figure A.2.8 
CCE. Data Entry
Screen.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 352/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

38 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.2.9 
Separator Data Input

Once the laboratory data is entered, we will disable, set weighting to the various options as
indicated below. To do so we will follow the same steps as indicated in example1.

i) All liquid drop data except 9.86%, which is the highest number, and
  5.51%, which is at 4500 psig, are disabled. The 5.51% has medium
weighting.
ii) The Z factor at dew point is included with high weighting.
iii) The saturation pressure is included.
iv) The first stage GOR and last stage density in separator
experiments have high weighting. The other GOR values have low
weighting.

Once this is done we go to the regression screen following the same steps as in example 1
and select the properties as follows

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 353/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 39 - 57

Figure A.2.10 
Regression Data Input

 After selecting regression properties click on Regress and this takes us to the screen below.
Chose the Tc, Pc data of all components except for the non-hydrocarbons and the binary
interaction coefficient between heavy fraction and methane, as indicated below and hit
Regress as was done in example 1

Figure A.2.11 
Regression Screen

This finishes the calibration of the EOS model to the laboratory data.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 354/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

40 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

A2.3 Checking results of the calibrated model against lab


data.
Once the model is calibrated, we need to check the model predictions against the lab data.
The first comparison is the CCE experiment. To simulate a CCE experiment in PVTP, from the
main menu go to Calculation | Constant Composition Expansion and the following dialogue
box will appear, where the range of pressure and temperature is entered.

Figure A.2.12: 
Setting up CCE
Simulation input.

If we are also computing oil FVF and GOR etc, we need to enter the
separator scheme that these values were calculated against in the CCE
  data. If we leave it blank all the GOR and FVF values reported in the
simulated experiment assume single stage atmospheric flash.

On this screen Press on Calc. This takes you to the next screen as shown below. On this
screen press Calc. again and the CCE calculations are performed.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 355/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 41 - 57

Figure A.2.13: 
Simulated CCE
Results.

Once these calculation is finished, hit on plot and a plot will be displayed. On this plot select,
pressure versus the liquid dropout to be displayed. The selection is on the top of the plot in the
drop down menu as shown in the figure below:

Figure A.2.14 
Simulated CCE versus
lab liquid dropout
Results.

This concludes the PVT calibration step.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 356/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

42 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

A2.4 Simulating PVT Experiments in PVTP  

In this section we will use PVTP to simulate the following experiments:

1. Wax appearance modelling

PVTP has the capacity to model, the temperatures at which wax starts to appear in the fluid. It
also has calculation routines, which work out the wax weight and mole percent and the
number of phases that are formed.

To access wax appearance calculations, from the main PVTP screen, go to Calc. Solids
options. Under this option select wax appearance temperature calculation. Once done the
following screen appears

Figure A.2.15 
Wax appearance
temperature Input
data.

There are various methods available for calculating wax appearance temperature. We have
selected the Pederson wax method. The pressure range over which the temperature is to
calculated is specified as well. Next we hit calculate and the following screen appears. On this
screen click on Calc. to start the calculations

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 357/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 43 - 57

Figure A.2.15 
Wax appearance
temperatures

In this case the calculations show that for all the pressures the wax appearance temperature
is around 70.2344 F

To calculate the amount of wax that deposits, click on PVT main on the previous screen. This
takes us to the main PVTP screen. On the main screen go to Calc. Solids options. Under this
option select Wax Amount calculation. Once done the following screen appears

Figure A.2.16 
Wax amount input
dialogue

There are various methods available for calculating wax appearance temperature. We have
selected the Pederson wax method. The pressure range over which the amount is to
PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 358/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

44 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

calculated is specified as well and so is the temperature of 70 F. Next we hit calculate and the
following screen appears. On this screen click on Calc. to start the calculations

Figure A.2.17 
Wax amount

This table gives the amount of wax that is formed. It also indicates the separation of the
original fluid into various phases.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 359/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 45 - 57

2. Hydrate and hydrate inhibitor modelling.

PVTP has the capacity to model, the hydrate appearance pressures. It also has calculation
routines, which work out the minimum inhibitor concentrations required to suppress hydrate
formation.

To access hydrate appearance calculations, from the main PVTP screen, go to Calc. Solids
options. Under this option select Hydrate Formation Pressure calculation over a range of
temperatures and a couple of inhibitor concentrations. Once done the following screen
appears

Figure A.2.18 
Hydrate appearance
Pressure Input data.

There are various methods available for hydrate formation pressures prediction. We have
selected the Kihara Potential P.E.H. method. The temperature range over which the pressure
is to calculated is specified as well. Next we hit calculate and the following screen appears. On
this screen click on Calc. to start the calculations

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 360/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

46 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.2.20 
Wax appearance
temperatures

In this case the calculations show the minimum hydrate formation pressures for a range of
temperatures and inhibitor concentrations.

To Plot the results press Plot and the following plot appears.

Figure A.2.21 
Hydrate formation plot

Hydrate Region

From the plot we can see that as the temperature and inhibitor concentration increase, the
hydrate formation pressures go up also and you need higher and higher pressure to form
hydrates. Click Exit to come out of the plot and click on PVT main to come to the main PVTP
screen.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 361/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 47 - 57

A3 Example 3 – Estimating Decontaminated sample


properties of an contaminated Oil Sample using PVTP 
This objectives of this example are:

• To familiarise the user with the decontamination procedure that can be used in PVTP

This example will take the user through the following steps:

Building an EOS Model

• How to make the C7+ distribution in PVTP follow the carbon number versus mole% profile
measured in laboratory.

Decontaminating in PVTP

Step by step
calibrated approach
EOS model of a to estimate the
contaminated uncontaminated sample properties from a
oil sample.

This example is in the samples directory under “ samples/pvtp/example3.pvi”

Input Data

 All the input data including the sampling is on a contaminated oil


  sample. The experiments like CCE, bubble point determination, etc
were performed on the contaminated sample.

Contaminated Reservoir Fluid Composition

Component Mole Percent


N2  0.05
CO2  0.15
C1  37.6
C2  9.7
C3  9.8
C4  6.6
C5  4.3
C6  3.5
C7+  28.3

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 362/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

48 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Reservoir Data:

Producing Interval Depth 10000-10050 feet


Reservoir Pressure 4000 psig
Reservoir Temperature 199.4 degF

Saturation Pressure Data of the Contaminated sample

Saturation pressure at 199.4 degF: 2800.0 psig

Separator Test Data of the Contaminated sample

 A multi stage separator experiment performed on the reservoir fluid resulted in the following
results:

Stage Pressure (Psig) Temp. degF GOR (scf/stb) Oil (API)


Density

#1 500 90 500
#2 0 60 300 34.2*

*34.2 API = 853.953 kg/m3 

Constant Mass Expansion Experiment results on the Contaminated sample:

The results of the constant mass study at done of the sample at 199.4 degF are:

Pressure in psig Oil Density


(Kg/m3)

Psat  2800 693.60


3100 697.55
3400 701.20
3700 704.66
Pres  4000 707.96

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 363/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 49 - 57

Extended Composition analysis of the C 7+ fraction contaminated Reservoir Fluid sample

C7 0.5413 C25 0.17 C43 0.0534

C8 0.5076 C26 0.1594 C44 0.05

C9 0.476 C27 0.1494 C45 0.0469

C10 0.4463 C28 0.1401 C46 0.044


C11 0.4185 C29 0.1314 C47 0.0413

C12 0.3924 C30 0.1232 C48 0.0387

C13 0.3679 C31 0.1155 C49 0.0363


C14 13.165 C32 0.1083 C50 0.034

C15 1.0926 C33 0.1016 C51 0.0319

C16 3.0245 C34 0.0952 C52 0.0299

C17 0.9606 C35 0.0893 C53 0.028


C18 2.9007 C36 0.0837 C54 0.0263

C19 0.2501 C37 0.0785 C55 0.0247

C20 0.2345 C38 0.0736 C56 0.0231


C21 0.2199 C39 0.069 C57 0.0217

C22 0.2062 C40 0.0647 C58+ 0.0203

C23 0.1933 C41 0.0607


C24 0.1813 C42 0.0569

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 364/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

50 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

A3.1 Step-by-step approach to decontamination in PVTP  

1. Defining the Contaminated System


You can match the contaminated oil sample following the steps exactly in the same fashion as

listed in example1. At the end of this you have a matched EOS model for the contaminated oil.

The starting point for this example is that we have matched an


  equation of state for the contaminated oil based on the laboratory
tests as indicated. The pseudo C7+ has been characterised.

2. Setting up the C 7+ profile as per measured data


To do so from the main PVTP screen go to the pseudo input data screen. To do so Click on
Data | Edit Composition | Pseudo Props. and it takes us to the following screen.

Figure
Pseudo-A.3.1 
Property input
screen

On this screen, click on the Advanced option and it will take you to the next screen whereby
PVTP generates a mole % profile for C7+ using the default method.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 365/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 51 - 57

Figure A.3.2 
 Advanced Pseudo-
Property screen

On this screen, we want to enter the profile, we have measured in the laboratory. To do so,
click on Set up Split Profile button and the following dialogue comes up. Fill the measured
mole% data against carbon number in the screen.

Figure A.3.3 
Setting up Profile

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 366/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

52 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Once the profile has been set-up, click on Exit and Save and it takes you back to the
advanced split screen. On this screen press Recalculate Split as shown below.

Figure A.3.4 
Recalculating the
Profile

Once this is done click on Exit and Save on all the screens that appears till you come to the
main PVTP screen.

3. Decontaminating the sample

Once the heavy end profile has been defined, from the main menu go to Data |
Decontaminate. This takes you to the decontamination input dialogue as shown below

Figure A.3.5 
Decontamination Input
Dialogue

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 367/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 53 - 57

This screen lists all the components along with their mole %, molecular weights etc. The C7+
components are listed in red.

The next step is to remove / re-estimate the excess mole % of heavy end hydrocarbon that
comes from the contaminant.
For this example we will try to estimate the contaminant mole % from the heavy end profile. If

we click on Plot on the previous screen, it gives the following plot.

Figure A.3.6 
Carbon number Vs
Mole %

The initial peak that is seen in the profile is because of C1 which is as expected. To see the
profile after C7 we can hold down the mouse button and draw a box around the area and it
results in a following zoomed plot.

Figure A.3.7 
Carbon number Vs
Mole %

Now after C7 the profile naturally is expected to be smooth as we had seen in example 1. The
peaks that we see in the profile from C14 to C18 are due the contamination from the oil based

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 368/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

54 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

mud. From this plot assuming a uniformly decreasing smooth curve the mole % of the C14-
C18 can be estimated. The estimated mole percent are

Component Old Mole Percent Estimated Mole


Percent
C14  13.165 0.323
C   1.0926 0.298
15
C16  3.0245 0.286
C17  0.9606 0.280
C18  2.9007 0.269

In case you know the exact composition of the contaminating fluid


  and contamination weight %, this can easily be converted into excess
mole % of that component. The excess mole % can be subtracted out
of the system and new mole percent estimated in the second column

Once the new mole percent are estimated, these are entered in the decontamination screen
as shown below

Figure A.3.8 
Decontamination
Procedure

Once new compositions are entered, press on Quick Look. This takes us to the next
screen where the program creates a temporary decontaminated stream and we can
quickly look at its properties

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 369/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 55 - 57

Figure A.3.9 
Decontamination
Quick Calc.

On this screen press again Quick Calc. It takes us to the next screen as shown

Figure A.3.10 

Decontamination
Quick Calc.

 At this stage PVTP has created a temporary decontaminated stream called Decon_Temp and
we can perform the listed calculations on it. Begin by selecting Phase envelope and pressing
Calc. This takes us to the following screen. On this screen, on the left hand side all the fluid
streams are listed. Select both the contaminated and decontaminated one and hit Calc.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 370/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

56 - 57 Appendix A - Worked Examples

Figure A.3.11 
Phase Envelopes

This picture shows how the phase envelopes compare. Because of decontamination the
saturation pressure goes up in this case. Click on Exit | cancel | Exit and it takes you to the
screen in figure A.3.8. On this screen click on Decontaminate, which take us to the following
screen.

Figure A.3.12 
Decontamination

On this screen you get two options. One in which you can create a new stream in the file with
the decontaminated fluid model or you can overwrite the contaminated one. We choose to add
a new stream.
 After this press Decontaminate and the program calculates the decontaminated fluid model
and displays the EOS parameters of the same as shown below

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 371/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP User Guide 57 - 57

Figure A.3.13 
EOS Parameters of
the Decontaminated
sample

Enter Exit and Save on this and subsequent screens to go to the main PVTP screen. At this
stage you will have a decontaminated fluid model.

PVTP User Guide 

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 372/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B Step by Step


Guide
This section describes the steps which can by followed to characterise a fluid with the PVT
Package. This route will be successful in all but the most difficult cases. The information
here is repeated in the form of help (PVTSTEP.HLP). This help is available from the Help
Menu on the main PVTP display.

Step 1: Create a New ( Section B.1)

Step 2: Select Equation of State Options ( Section B.2)

Step 3: Select Components ( Section B.3)

Step 4: Enter Composition ( Section B.4)


also see Sample PVT Report Composition ( Section B.4.1)

Step 5: Initialise the Pseudo Component Properties ( Section B.5)

Step 6: Match the Surface Volumetric Properties (Density, GOR etc.) using the

 Automatch feature ( Section B.6)

Step 7: Use Pseudo-Splitting or BI Coefficients to get near Reservoir Saturation


Pressure Value ( Section B.7)

also see Using BI Coefficients ( Section B.7.1)


Using Pseudo Splitting ( Section B.7.2)

Step 8: Select Match Parameters ( Section B.8)

Step 9: Use Regression to Match Fluid ( Section B.9)

Step 10: Check and Refine the Fluid Characterisation ( Section B.10)

Step 11: Calculate, Report and Export ( Section B.11)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 373/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Create a new file by selecting the New command., from the File menu.
This can be done at any time.

See also:

(Section 3.1)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 374/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 3 - 30

or use icon 

Part of a typical display is shown below :

The program will default to the most commonly used combinations i.e.

♦ 1 Method set to Equation of State and



2 Equation of State set to Peng Robinson
Clicking on is enough to move on to the next step

More detail on alternative entries is given in Options (Section 5.4 )

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 375/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

or use icon 

 A typical display is shown below :

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 376/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 5 - 30

The important selections are :

◊ 1 Choose the required components by clicking on the names within the listbox. The
number of components depends on the application and the information available within
the PVT report. See Sample PVT Report Composition. The Reservoir or Wellstream

analysishave
should will contain a listwith
associated of components upWeight
it a Molecular to C6, and
C10,aC12, CxxGravity.
Specific etc. TheThis
plus fraction
information is required to characterise the Pseudo Component(s) in Step 5 Normally,
selecting up to C6 and having a C7+ pseudo is enough for all oils and most
condensates.

◊ 2 Enter the number of Pseudo Components (normally 1) and

◊ 3 Click on Edit Composition to proceed to next step

The difference in properties between normal and iso butane and normal and iso
pentane do not warrant there inclusion as separate components. The program will run
faster if nC5 and iC5 are lumped together under the nC5 label. Similarily, with nC4 and
iC4 should be lumped as nC4.

More detail on alternative entries is given in database Selection (Section 7.1)

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 377/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

or use icon 

but normally the display is loaded using the button


on the Select Components page (Step 3)

 A typical display is shown below

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 378/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 7 - 30

Enter the composition in mole % from the Reservoir or Wellstream analysis for each
component (1) and pseudo component (2).See Sample PVT Report Composition (Section
 A.4.1). A running total of the entries is displayed (3).
 At this point reference data , especially the temperature at which the sample was taken,
should be entered in area 4. This temperature will be used to conduct the Saturation
Pressure calculations within Step 7
When all entries are complete click on (5) to move on to the next step.

More detail on alternative entries is given in Edit Composition (Section 7.2)

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 379/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

8 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

HYDROCARBON ANALYSIS OF SEPARATOR PRODUCTS TO AND CALCULATED

WELLSTREAM

TO HEPTANES PLUS AND CALCULATED WELLSTREAM

SAMPLES
Separator Separator Wellstream
Component Liq. Mole % Gas Mole % GPM Mole %

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrogen sulphide 0.00 0.00 0.00
Carbon dioxide 0.16 0.90 0.50
Nitrogen 0.01 0.32 0.15
Methane 6.02 77.97 38.87
Ethane 4.94 12.58 3.364 8.4  
Propane 6.53 5.51 1.518 6.06
i-Butane 1.45 0.56 0.183 1.04
n-Butane 4.84 1.38 0.435 3.26
i-Pentane 1.97 0.22 0.080 1:17
n-Pentane 3.35 0.29 0.105 1 95
Hexanes 4.81 0.15 0.058 2.68
Heptanes plus 65.92 0.12 0.053
Totals 100.00 100.00 5.796 100.00
Heptanes plus properties
Molecular weight : 225 103 (assumed) 225
Density at 600F (gloc)0.8527 0.7370 (assumed) 0.8526
 API at 600F Cg/cc) 34.3 34.3

1 0.00.....2.68%
2 Individual component(C7+)
Pseudo Component compositions andSG
molecular weight 225  and C7+0.8526 
pseudo
  composition

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 380/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 9 - 30

 At least one pseudo component should have been identified in step 3. After the pseudo
percentage(s) have been entered in step 4 , click on the Pseudo Props. button to display
to bring up the important Pseudo Properties Display

 A typical display is shown below:

The purpose of this step is to give the pseudo component(s) an initial set of properties.

The pseudo is the greatest unknown within the composition and is always composed of a
mixture of many compounds with a wide variety of individual properties. It is therefore, not
surprising that the characterisation of these compounds is the key area of EOS PVT
matching.
The starting values for Tc, Pc , AF etc. are taken from correlations. Normally the PVT
report will give SG and Molecular Weight information for the plus component. See Sample
PVT Report Composition Section A.4.1). . Enter the values in the table (1). The
PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 381/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

10 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide


correlation(s) will calculate a Boiling Point and use this with SG and Mwt. to fill in the other
properties (2). The default correlations are Petroleum Experts for BPt. and Twu/Edminster
for Tc, Pc , AF . Clicking on Calculate Values(3) or exiting the pseudo properties dialogue
will initiate the property estimation.

The correlation can by changed by using the combo boxes in area (4)

Our recommendation for this selection is :

⇒ For , try
1. Petroleum Experts Correlation for Boiling Point
2. TWU/Edmister for Acentric Factor etc.

The properties of the pseudo(s) will only be recalculated if the Boiling Point value
for that pseudo is blanked out.

The mode (5) should normally be set at Automatic. Manual mode assumes the user will
type in all the properties.
When the initial properties are in place, the user should move on to step 6 for further
pseudo characterisation.
More detail on alternative entries is given in Pseudo Properties (Section 7.3)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 382/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 11 - 30

The Equation of State model is not ,at present, predictive. This weakness leads to the need
for extensive fluid matching.
In addition, the model is particularly poor at estimating liquid densities.
The combination of these factors leads to an overall picture of an equation with many
variables ,many component properties and therefore many routes to matching a complex
fluid over a range of pressures and temperatures. If an efficient route is not taken, it can be
very difficult to resolve the overall picture especially with regard to reservoir and separator
densities.
Since all volumetric oil properties FVF GOR etc. are derived from density it is critical that
this area is accurately modelled.

Within the PVT package two liquid densities are calculated by two different methods. The
first is based on an empirical correlation from Standing and Katz. The second is calculated
from the Equation of State liquid compressibility.
Experience has shown that the Standing and Katz value which is derived mainly from
specific gravities is always fairly close to the measured density at surface conditions.
The Automatch process involves a series of flashes at 60 degrees F and 1 atm with an
adjustment to the pseudo properties after each flash. The aim is to bring the EOS density
in line with that calculated by Standing and Katz. The boiling point (s) of the pseudo(s) are
adjusted after each iteration and the other properties recalculated using the new value.
Figure 1 illustrates the result of Automatch on a typical oil

The effect of Automatching is to move the lower end of the phase envelope into a realistic
area giving close to the correct values for separator oil density GOR FVF etc.. The
matching of this area becomes minimal ,allowing the overall regression to move more

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 383/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

12 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide


smoothly to a solution. In general, the top end of the phase envelope is little changed for
oils during Automatch . With condensates, the Saturation Pressure may become
depressed enough to require remedial action i.e. splitting (see Step 7)

How to Automatch
 Automatching is a very straightforward process. Enter the Pseudo Properties Dialogue as
described in Step 5.

 A typical display would be :

Simply click on the button . Split into two each time . Check the effect on the
Saturation Pressure after each split (see Step 7)
 A feature is provided within the program to store and restore pseudo component data. The
program will automatically store the first entries in this dialog. The can be used to
undo a split if the Saturation Pressure becomes too large.
If this method proves to be unsuccessful more control over the Split by using the Advanced
function.

See also Decontamination Procedure(Apendix B)


: Automatch is not suitable for gases as it depends on liquid being formed
When Automatch is complete proceed to Step 7
More detail on alternative entries is given in Pseudo Properties (Section 7.3)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 384/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 13 - 30

The aim of this step is to assist the package to smoothly find the reservoir fluid Saturation
Pressure. The aim is to use various techniques to get in the proximity(within 5%) of the
correct value. The regression mechanism can then be used to match the value exactly.
When Step 6 is complete and the Pseudo Properties Dialogue is exited , the program will
be showing the Edit Composition Dialogue as shown below.

 All the operations required for this step are available within this dialogue. Make sure a
reference temperature is entered at point 4
 After each operation the saturation pressure can be found by clicking on the
button at point 1. This brings up the :

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 385/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

14 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Select and press to bring up the message box containing


the result:

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 386/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 15 - 30

See Using and for details of each method and its effects

Oils are value.


desired normally
Thestraightforward.
difference can The Saturation
normally Pressure
be made is commonlyBinary
up by introducing quite Interaction
close to the
Coefficients. In some cases, splitting may be required. The recommended sequence is :

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 387/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 388/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 17 - 30

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 389/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

18 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Figure 2 shows the effect of adding Binary Interaction Coefficients to a real condensate
example. This pattern of behaviour is commonly found.

 Adding the coefficients moves the phase envelope from values depicted by curve B to
those making up curve A. Although there is an increase in saturation pressure over most
of the temperature range e.g. , the envelope tends also to tilt leaving some areas with a
lowered PSat. e.g.

In this example ,there is negligible movement at the reservoir temperature leaving the
match point PSat as far away as before. Adjusting BI Coefficients is not recommended for
condensates other than making up small (<10%) differences between calculated and
match PSat values. Splitting the last pseudo component is the preferred option with
condensates which exhibit the behaviour shown above.

See Using Splitting to Match Saturation Pressure (Section A.7.2)


Oils , in contrast, can benefit from adding BI coefficients. The saturation pressure is
normally closer to the initial calculated value and the phase envelope range is normally like
that of in figure 2. Splitting with oils also tends to give an excessively high value which
cannot be easily brought back by regression.

Where the difference between the calculated and match values are small the difference
can be made up by manually adjusting the BI Coefficient(s) of C1 with the heaviest
component(s).This value has the greatest influence on the saturation pressure calculation

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 390/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 19 - 30

Click on the button within the Edit Composition (Section 7.2) to display the
Binary Interaction Coefficients Dialogue.
 A typical example is shown below :

 Any coefficient can be changed by clicking on a cell and typing in a new value. Use the
combo boxes to give options on calculating a new set of values. Buttons are provided for
zeroing all components, or those of the pure (non-pseudo) components.

See BI Coefficients Dialog (Section 7.4) for more detail on the options available.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 391/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

20 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Figure 3 shows the effect of Pseudo Splitting on a real condensate example.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 392/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 21 - 30

Splitting is a very straightforward process. Enter the Pseudo Properties Dialogue as


described in Step 5.

 A typical display would be :

Simply click on the button . Split into two each time . Check the effect on the
Saturation Pressure after each split (see Step 7)
 A feature is provided within the program to store and restore pseudo component data. The
program will automatically store the first entries in this dialog. The can be used to
undo a split if the Saturation Pressure becomes too large.
If this method proves to be unsuccessful more control over the Split by using the Advanced
function.
See also Decontamination Procedure(see Appendix B).

should be done after each split (see Step 6) to ensure that surface
properties are maintained.

More detail on alternative entries is given in Pseudo Properties(Section 7.3)

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 393/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

22 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

The Equation of State model is not predictive. Without matching, the equations will work
mathematically. Unfortunately, the results will ,in many cases, diverge greatly from the
known characteristics of the fluid.
Matching ties the model to real points in the PVT behaviour of the fluid, giving the
equations less freedom to drift into unrealistic areas.

 An important principle to understand at this point is that the Equation of State does not
respect the fundamental law of conservation of mass. Figure 4 illustrates why this may be
a problem.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 394/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 23 - 30

approach causes can be very significant and will come out in many ways e.g. in the
inability to resolve reserves with production.

To avoid such problems we recommend that reservoir and separator matching must


always be done together Densities or density derived data must be included for reservoir
and surface to force a material balance on the system.

NOTE Thedirectly
calculated EOS calculation initially
from the Zs. calculates
Matching Zliquid
Z matches and Zvapour. Densities are
density

The recommended minimum information to be used for matching is:


1 Bubble Point pressure
2 A measure of density (oil density or Zliquid) at reservoir or saturation pressure conditions
3 Some measure of Separator volumetric properties i.e. GOR or oil FVF
4 A measure of density (oil density or Zliquid) at separator or stock tank conditions


1 Dew Point pressure
2 A measure of density (gas density or Zvapour) at reservoir or saturation pressure
conditions
3 Some measure of Separator volumetric properties i.e. GOR or oil FVF
4 A measure of condensate density (oil density or Zliquid) at separator or stock tank
conditions
5 Liquid Dropout (CCE or CVD) from reservoir pressure to surface conditions

or use icon 

will bring up the match table dialogue. This consists of a series of tables one for each
measurement/calculation.

 Any cell can be filled in with data. Blanks are allowed where data is not available or
unreliable.

Make sure all pressure steps are entered for SEP(Separator) and CVD(Constant Volume
Depletion).

Figure 5 6 7 and 8 illustrates the data used for a real condensate example.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 395/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

24 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 396/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 25 - 30

The value at reservoir pressure ensures that any deviation of compressibility above the
dewpoint is properly modelled

Note that all separator stages have been included as the final oil density depends on the
path to Stock Tank conditions.. With multiple stage separators it is best to match first on
the main stage. In addition, when GOR numbers are much smaller in the subsequent
stages,it is unlikely that these values are as accurate. We suggest that a lower
weighting.eg. 3 is given to these numbers. see help on Match Data Tables for Weighting
and Inclusion/Exclusion.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 397/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

26 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

The CVD process also includes all stages including the start point at the saturation
pressure value. Missing out any stage will alter the values for all stages below it.

There are many ways to approach dropout matching and no best way to do it. One thing to
keep in mind is that the values are not as accurately measured as density or saturation
pressure. For that reason the values should all be given a lower weighting e.g. 3. This
prevents important numbers like PSAT moving to help dropout to match. It is also better
not to start with all values included in the match. Give the program 2 or 3 representative
points, match to them and view the result. If required include more points until a reasonable
match is produced. See help on Match Data Tables(Section 7.8) for Weighting and
Inclusion/Exclusion

for CCE dropout the values expected are relative to the volume at step not the
volume at reservoir volume . Most PVT reports give dropout relative to reservoir. To
convert the values devide the dropout figure by the relative volume at each pressure step.

When all entries are complete click on to move on to the next step.

More detail on alternative entries is given in MatchData Tables(Section 7.8)

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 398/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 27 - 30

or use icon 

Regression is a two stage process. In the first, the user must select which calculations
should be matched.
Selecting regression brings up the dialogue illustrated below:

Each column within the match table (Step 8) has an equivalent checkbox within this
dialogue.

It is recommended that all calculations with the exception of any CVD or GRAD variables
should be selected at once.
The total selected is displayed at point 4. Every calculation can be given a high , medium
or low weighting which changes its contribution to the overall error.

Unless be
should theleft
match value is suspect or of lower accuracy (e.g. a dropout), the weighting
as high.
When the calculations have been selected, click on to move on to the next
stage

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 399/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

28 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

See Regression Match Data (Section 7. 8) for details on alternative selections.


The next stage is to select the parameters to be used during regression.

 A typical Regression Parameter Dialogue is shown below :

Generalising a regression strategy is difficult. Fortunately,however, with the PVTP most oils
and condensates can be matched in a single shot. When using a full composition , it is
recommended that allTc Pcs should be selected for C1 and all components below. In
addition, any binary interaction coefficients should also be selected. See What Properties
to Use in Regression and Matching Viscosities for more information.

Vc is only used when viscosity is being matched (see Matching Viscosities)


Click on to initiate the matching calculations. The process stops when a
maximum number of steps has been passed or the error term CHI falls to below 1e-09.The
process can be restated if not enough steps have been taken.
If the regression fails to converge satisfactorily, more component properties can be added.

See Regression for more information on options and strategies.


When the first round regression has been completed more difficult variables such as
dropout can be added and the process repeated.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 400/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide 29 - 30

It is important to check and refine the model of the system.


Use the calculation menu options to check the values produced for the match parameters.
In addition , other non-matched parameters should be calculated and compared with the
PVT report values to test the validity of the model.

Remember that all the reported values will not be as of the same accuracy. For example,
small dropout values are difficult to measure.
Check the scatter of percentage dropout points using the (Section 7.11) facility,
prior to deciding the weighting of the calculation (Step 9) and which point(s) should be
used for matching.

If an oil or condensate does not readily match using the method outlined here , our
experience has been that in many cases detailed investigation of the reported data has
shown an inconsistency. The error normally lies in the area of sampling and handling .

Matching
done SeeaMatchData
compositional gradient
Tables to fix7.9)
(Section a pressure
for moreor other variable
information. Thiswith depth can
calculation be
is very
important if a significant gradient is anticipated or if there is a gas - oil contact within the
reservoir If modelling is to be done successfully, it is recommended that at least two
sampled points should be available within the oil leg.

The reason for this suggestion is that the gradient is a function of fluid density The
variability in oil density with depth may not be well enough characterised with only one
match point

If matching a gradient becomes problematic, it is recommended that the Pseudo Splitting


function should be tried. The Compositional Gradient calculation is done on the basis of a
component's Molecular Weight. For the pseudos ,the individual species which will make up
the component are changing with depth. This should be represented as a change in
pseudo make-up and therefore Molecular Weight with depth. At present, however, within
PVTP, the pseudo is represented as having a fixed composition with depth. Splitting allows
the program to manipulate the new pseudos via their relative compositions to achieve the
Molecular Weight change.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 401/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

30 - 30 Appendix B - Step by Step Guide

Characterising a fluid is not normally an end in itself. The aim is to make use of the model
produced in a way that helps us to understand and predict the effect of the fluid's PVT on
all aspects of its processing.

The main uses include


Calculating values not covered by well tests or laboratory measurements. Use
(Section 8) to carry out any of the many calculation options
available with the PVT package.

Utilising (Section 8.2) function to visualise the behaviour of the fluid over
a wide range of temperatures and pressures

(Section 3.12) the characterised composition to Prosper for compositional nodal


analysis (see Export /Prosper)

Calculation of Black Oil properties which can by exported to Prosper ,MBAL etc. in the form
of Black Oil Tables. This is particularly important for characterising condensates.(
 and Section 3.12)

Use (Section 8.9) to understand the changes of phase and


composition with depth within a reservoir. This can in many cases explain what sometimes
seems the unnatural behaviour of complex reservoirs. Connection between wells can be
confirmed. Peculiar changes in GOR etc. with production can be explained. If the PVT of a
reservoir is understood , everything else becomes clearer.

Use the (Section 8.3.1) function to sample the composition of the oil or gas which
results from a process change (separator calculation) , reservoir depletion (CVD, DIFF or

DEPL) or change of depth (GRAD)


(Section 9) can be used to send compositions , regression information and
calculation results in an organised fashion to printers, clipboard, or spreadsheets.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 402/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix C
Decontamination
Procedure
NOTE
This procedure represents one way of decontaminating a sample. It may not be
applicable to all situations and the results cannot be guaranteed. The flexibility of
the program also allows other paths to a solution to be followed.

The object of this exercise is to identify the effects of a contaminant within a fluid and to
remove this contamination in a controlled manner.

What should be available is


 the characteristics of the contaminated fluid i.e. a PVT report
 an extended analysis of the contaminated fluid and
 an estimate of what the fluid composition would be without the contaminant

What we are going to do is a match to the known characteristics with a split history that
reflects the addition of the contaminant.

This is done by using the Split Profile feature.

Matching gives the properties of the pseudo components and the split history identifies how
they were put together.
In the decontamination display the program breaks the matched fluid back down into the
many split parts along with compositions and properties associated with each part.

The user can then set the compositions to that of the uncontaminated fluid. When this is
done the program adjusts the compositions and properties to reflect the change and
recombines the split parts to workable pseudo components.

This new working composition can be used to generate data for an uncontaminated model.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 403/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

2-7 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure

 STEP 1 Follow the Step by Step Guide until you reach step 5. A single C7+ pseudo
component should be sufficient for most fluids.

 STEP 2. Enter the pseudo component MWt and SG. within the Pseudo Properties page
and click on the Advanced  button within the Split/Profile area at the bottom of the
display.

 STEP 3. Within the Advanced Splitting Dialog select the Follow Profile  method using
the combo box provided above the table. click on the Setup Split Profile  button.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 404/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure 3-7

 STEP 4. Within the Split Profile Dialog enter the detailed composition of the
contaminated fluid. Only the areas of strong contamination are required. The program
will fill in the rest with a standard distribution. Click on Exit and Save.

 STEP 5. Back within the Advanced Splitting dialog click on  Recalculate Split  to
implement the profile.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 405/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

4-7 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure

 STEP 6. It is possible to undertake the tasks described as step 6 (Auto matching) and
step 7 (getting near reservoir PSAT)within the Step by Step Guide within this display.
Complete these operations now. this is preferable to exiting and coming back into the
 Advanced Splitting dialog . The reason is that Advanced  in the Pseudo Properties
Dialog applies to the last pseudo component. If splitting has been done, you must use
Restore the Original Numbers to get back to your starting point. When you are happy
with your entries click on Exit and Save.

 STEP 7. The Stream now contains a set of partly matched pseudo components with a
full history of how they were put together. Continue to fully match this fluid as described
in the Step by Step Guide .

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 406/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure 5-7

 STEP 8 When fully matched, select Decontaminate from the Data menu. This brings
up the Decontamination Control Dialog. The compositions presented are based on the
split history of stream. This will contain the profile created in Step 4. Click on Plot  to
view the component distribution. the properties of the expanded pseudos are derived
form the matched pseudos. they therefore contain a measure of the effect of each

expanded component on the overall characteristics of the fluid.

 STEP 9 Enter the estimated values for the composition of the undecontaminated fluid
in the New Mole% column. this can be derived from the amount and composition of the
contaminant and the original composition of the contaminated sample. Only the area of
obvious contamination needs to be entered. Click on Plot to view the results. Click on
the Quick Look button to view the effects of your entries. this option creates a
temporary stream containing the decontaminated fluid.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 407/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

6-7 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure

 STEP 10. To complete the decontamination process click on Decontaminate. The


Output Selection Dialog which appears allows you to pick between using the existing
stream or creating a new one. It would normally be better to create a new version as it
allows your starting point to be kept for comparison and future reference.

 STEP 11. On returning to the Decontamination Control Dialog the display will contain
information on the results of the decontamination.
 The decontamination calculation proceeds as follows:
 The individual component mole percents are set equal to the New Mole% 
values , where defined.
 The remaining component mole percents are adjusted to make up the 100%
total and to follow the trend of the original values.
 The new full composition appears as the Cald. %.
 The Calcd% are used in conjunction with the initial properties to generate a new
set of properties for each component and a combined version for each of the
pseudo components. The pseudo component start and end values can be seen
by clicking on the View/Change button.

The trend in the individual compositions can be seen by using the Plot button.

Petroleum Experts

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 408/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

 Appendix C - Decontamination Procedure 7-7

 STEP 12 The decontamination procedure is now complete. Click on Exit and Save and
then File|Save to store the results.

 STEP 13 An effort should be made to confirm the accuracy of the fluid model against
any other known properties of the reservoir fluid e.g. field separator data when it

becomes available or the reservoir fluid density from RFT measurements.

PVTP User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 409/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPEN 
SERVER 

OPENSERVER   PVTP
OPENSERVER

D1 Introduction
OPENSERVER   PVTP

OPENSERVER
PVTP

D1.1 About This Guide

PVTP

D1.2 What is in this guide


 Chapter 2   OPENSERVER
OPENSERVER

 Chapter 3
OPENSERVER

 Chapter 4   OPENSERVER
OPENSERVER
 
 Chapter 5 PVTP   OPENSERVER
PVTP   OPENSERVER

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 410/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D1.3 How To Use This Guide


OPENSERVER
OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER
OPENSERVER

D1.4 Symbols and Conventions

MBAL GAP

Keycap
Done
Menu Command
File - Open
➲ 


RIGHT
 MBAL

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 411/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D2 Overview
OPEN SERVER Open Architecture

OPENSERVER

D2.1 Basic Functions

D2.2 GetValue

D2.3 SetValue

D2.4 DoCommand

OPENSERVER

GAP
MBAL

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 412/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D2.5 Calling the Functions

OPENSERVER

D2.6 Automation
OPENSERVER  Automation

OPENSERVER Automation
Automation
Automation

 Automation

 Automation

Automation

 
D2.7 Batch File
Automation

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 413/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D3 Potential Uses
OPENSERVER

D3.1 Batch Runs


MBAL

 MBAL


D3.2 Custom Reporting

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 414/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D3.3 Data Import/Export


OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER   MBAL
MBAL

D3.4 Enhanced Prediction Runs in GAP 


OPENSERVER   GAP

D3.5 Running PETEX programs with other


engineering software applications
OPENSERVER

 GAP

 GAP

 GAP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 415/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D4 Support
OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 416/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D5 Using the OPENSERVER 

Automation
OPENSERVER

GAP PVTP

Automation

D5.1 Variable Text Strings

PVTP 
PVT GAP PROSPER MBAL
GAP PROSPER MBAL

MBAL

MBAL MBAL

MBAL
MBAL

MBAL

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 417/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

MBAL

MBAL

D5.2 Automation
Automation

Automation

Automation

Automation

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 418/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D5.2.1 Example Macro


MBAL

MBAL

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 419/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D5.2.2 Framework
OPENSERVER

Dim Server As Object

OPENSERVER

Server.DoCommand(Command1)
Server.DoCommand(Command2)
Server.GetValue(Var1)  

Set Server = Nothing

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 420/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 421/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D5.2.5 DoCommandAsync

OPENSERVER

 
Unless you have good reason to do otherwise, it is strongly recommended that
you re-use the DoSlowCmd() macro subroutine shown in the example macro
for all your own applications as it already has error handling built in as well as
the code to wait for the function to finish.

D5.2.6 GetValue

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 422/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

 
Unless you have good reason to do otherwise, it is recommended that you re-
use the DoGet() macro function shown in the example macro for all your own
applications as it already has error handling built in.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 423/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D5.3 Batch File

D5.3.1 Running a Batch File

MBAL GAP

MBAL
MBAL

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 424/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 425/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 426/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6 PVTP and the OPENSERVER

D6.1 OverView
OPEN SERVER

OPENSERVER

OPENSERVER

PVTP

PVTP OPENSERVER

 BLACKOIL
 OPTIONS
 STREAMBASE[stream no. or stream name]
 STREAMRUN[stream no. or stream name]
 CALCUL[stream no. or stream name]

Note

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 427/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.2 File and Streams


PVTP

without
without

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 428/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.3 BLACKOIL

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 429/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.4 OPTIONS
PVTP

Options

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 430/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.5 STREAMBASE[stream no. or stream name]

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 431/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 432/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 433/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.6 STREAMRUN[stream no. or stream name]

Flash

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 434/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 435/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.7 CALCUL[stream no. or stream name]

FLASH
OPENSERVER

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 436/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 437/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 438/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 439/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.8 Carrying out Calculations and Obtaining Results

PVTP

  BLACKOIL_OIL
  BLACKOIL_GAS
BLACKOIL_COND
CRITPOINT -
PHASEENV -
PSAT
CCE
CVD
DIFF
SEP

COMPGRAD
SWELL
DEPL
BLACKOIL_EXPORT
CCE_WITH_WATER
SEP_WITH_WATER
COMPOS –
MULTIPHASE
WAXTEMP
HYDRATE
ISENTHALPIC_FLASH
SLIMTUBE –
WATER_SATURATION

FLASH

RESET_STREAM_IN_CALC_FLAGS

DoCmd "PVT.KEYWORD[Wellstream]"

CALC_COLUMN_TOTAL
CALC_NUM_RESULTS
CALC_COLUMN_NAME[n]
CALC_COLUMN_UNIT[n]
CALC_COLUMN_VALUE[l][n]

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 440/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 441/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.8.1 Analysis

' Get analysis number iRes


Worksheets(Sheet).Cells(4, 2) = iRes
' display the analysis block temperature and pressure
iErr = DisplayCellData("Temperature", DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].STAGE_TEMP"))
iErr = DisplayCellData("Pressure", DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) + "].CALC_ANALYSIS[" +
CStr(iRes) + "].STAGE_PRESS"))
Worksheets(Sheet).Range("A10:E200").ClearContents
'find number of components
iNumComp = DoGetCheck("PVT.STREAMRUN[" + CStr(iStream) + "].NUMCOMPONENTS")
iLine = 10
For icomp = 0 To iNumComp - 1
' get component name liquid composition vapour composition and K values
Worksheets(Sheet).Cells(iLine + icomp, 1) = DoGet("PVT.STREAMRUN[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].COMPONENT[" + CStr(icomp) + "]")
Worksheets(Sheet).Cells(iLine + icomp, 2) = DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].LIQUID_COMPOSITION[" + CStr(icomp) + "]")
Worksheets(Sheet).Cells(iLine + icomp, 3) = DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].VAPOUR_COMPOSITION[" + CStr(icomp) + "]")
Worksheets(Sheet).Cells(iLine + icomp, 4) = DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].KVALUES[" + CStr(icomp) + "]")
Next
iLine = iLine + iNumComp
' Get Extra data
iErr = DisplayCellData("Percent Vapour", DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].VAP_PERCENT"))
iErr = DisplayCellData("Percent Liquid", DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) +
"].CALC_ANALYSIS[" + CStr(iRes) + "].LIQ_PERCENT"))
iErr = DisplayCellData("Oil Gravity", DoGetCheck("PVT.CALCUL[" + CStr(iStream) + "].CALC_ANALYSIS["
+ CStr(iRes) + "].OIL_GRAVITY"))

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 442/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

D6.9 Flash Calculation

OPENSERVER   PVTP



PVTP

D6.10 Small Separator Calculation

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 443/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

PVTP OPENSERVER

PVTP

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 444/445
8/18/2019 Pvtp Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pvtp-manual 445/445

You might also like